Direct And Indirect Speech : Definition & Types with Examples in Telugu

by

అధ్యాయము 15

Direct And Indirect Speech

98. ఒక speaker యొక్క మాటలను మనం రెండు విధములుగా report చేయవచ్చును.
(a) అతను చెప్పింది చెప్పినట్లుగా report చేయుట. దీనిని Direct speech అని అంటాము.
(b) ఆయన చెప్పిన మాటలను చెప్పింది చెప్పినట్లుగా కాకుండా వానిని మన మాటలలో అతను ఇలా చెప్పినాడు అని చెబుతూ report చేయుట. దీనిని Indirect speech లేక Reported speech అని అంటారు.
Direct.        Rama said, ‘I am very busy now.”
Indirect.      Rama said that he was very busy then.

Direct Speech పద్ధతిలో speaker యొక్క మాటలను అదే విధంగా రాయుచూ అటు చివర ఇటు చివర inverted commas ను (“—” ) పెట్టవలయును.
Indirect speech విషయంలో ఈ కామా గుర్తులు అక్కరలేదు.
పై పద్ధతులలో అమలుపరచవలసిన కొన్ని మార్పులు ఉన్నవి: (Indirect పద్ధతిలో)
1) పై వాక్యములలో Indirect statement కు ముందు భాగములో “that” ను ఉపయోగించుట,
2) Pronoun అయిన  “I” “he” గా మారుతుంది.
3) Verb పదము అయిన “am” “was” గా మారుతుంది.
4) Adverb అయిన “now” అను పదము “then” గా మారుతుంది.

Rules For Changing Direct Speech Into Indirect

99. Reporting verb principal verb era sor. verb 35 past tense భావములో ఉన్నప్పుడు Direct speech వాక్యములోని present tense verbs అన్నియూ past tense verb గా మారిపోవును. ఈ విధంగా :
(a) A simple present tense simple past గా మారిపోవును.
Direct.                He said, ‘I am unwell.
Indirect.             He said (that) he was unwell.
B) Present continuous tense past perfect గా మారిపోవును.
Direct.                He said,’My master is writing letters.’
Indirect.              He said (that) his master was writing letters.
C) Present perfect tense, past perfect tense గా మారిపోవును.
Direct.                He said, “I have passed the examination.’
Indirect.             He said (that) he had passed the examination.

Direct And Indirect Speech Definition And Types with Examples in Telugu

Read and Learn more Synthesis of Sentences

గమనిక (Note: Future tense లో ఉన్న ‘shall’ అను auxiliary verb ‘ should ‘ గా మారిపోవును మరియు Future tense లో ఉన్న ‘will’ అను auxiliary verb ‘would’ గా గాని ‘should’ గా గాని మారిపోవును. ఖచ్చితమైన rule ఏమిటంటే Direct speech వాక్యములోనున్న simple past tense indirect speech లో past perfect tense గా మారిపోవును.
Direct.                          He said The horse died in the night.”
Indirect.                       He said that the horse had died in the night.

99 A. ప్రపంచవ్యాప్తంగా ఉన్న ఒక నిజాన్ని చెప్పునపుడు (axiom) గాని, main clause లోనున్న statement ఇప్పటికీ అమలులో ఉన్నప్పుడుగాని, subordinate clause లో ఉన్న tenses మారవు. ఇట్టి పరిస్థితిలో మనకు నచ్చిన tense ను subordinate clause లో అవసరాన్నిబట్టి వాడవచ్చును.
Direct.                    ‘I know her address’ said Gopi.
Indirect.                  Gopi said he knows/knew her address.
Direct.                     The teacher said, ‘The earth goes round the sun.’
Indirect.                  The teacher said the earth goes/went round the sun.
Direct.                     ‘German is easy to learn’, she said.
Indirect.                   She said German is/was easy to learn
ఒక statement నిజమా కాదా అన్న సందేహము ఉన్నపుడు చాలా చోట్ల past tense ను ఉపయోగిస్తాము.

100. Reporting verb (Indirect speech లోనున్న verb పదము ) Present Tense, లో  Direct Speech tenses మారవు. ఈ విధమైన వాక్యములు :-
He says he is unwell.
He has just said his master is writing letters.
He says he has passed the examination.
He says the horse died in the night.

101. అవసరమైన చోట్ల Direct speech లోని pronouns లో మార్పులు చోటుచేసుకుంటాయి. ఈ విధంగా చేసినట్లయితే, పై reporter కు వానితో మాట్లాడే వానికి గల సంబంధాలు బాగుగా తెలియును. Original speaker ను ఇచ్చట గమనించవలసిన పనిలేదు.
Direct.                He said to me, ‘I don’t believe you.
Indirect.             He said he didn’t believe me.
Direct.              She said to him. ‘I don’t believe you
Indirect.           ” She said she didn’t believe him.
Direct.                I said to him,’1 don’t believe you.”
Indirect.              I said to him,’1 don’t believe you.”
Direct.               I said to you, ‘I don’t believe you.”
Indirect.            I said I didn’t believe you.

102. కాలము యొక్క సామీప్యతను, స్థలము యొక్క సామీప్యతను తెలియజేయు పదములు కాలము యొక్కయు, స్థలము యొక్కయు దూరమును తెలియజేయునవిగా మార్పుచెందును.

nowbecomesthentodaybecomesthat day
here“theretomorrow“the next day
ago“beforeyesterday“the day before
thus“solast night“the night before

Direct.      He said, ‘I am glad to be here this evening.’
Indirect.   He said that he was glad to be there that evening.

Speach ఒకే సమయములో గాని, ఒకే place లోగాని సంభవించినట్లయితే, పైన చెప్పిన మార్పులు జరగవు.
Direct.       He says, “I am glad to be here this evening.”
Indirect.    He says he is glad to be here this evening.

103. This మరియు these అను పదములు that and those గా మార్పు చెందును. ఆ సంఘటన దగ్గరలోనే జరిగితే ఈ మార్పు అవసరంలేదు.

Questions

104. Questions  report Indirect Speech ‘asked’  ‘inquired’ అను పదములతో ప్రవేశ పెట్టడం జరుగుతుంది.
ప్రశ్న interrogative తో (asked అని గాని inquired అనిగాని) గాకుండా ప్రారంభమైతే, reporting  verb నకు వెనువెంటనే whether గాని if గాని ఉండును.
Direct.                He said to me, ‘What are you doing?”
Indirect.              He asked me what I was doing.
Direct.                “Where do you live?” asked the stranger.
Indirect.              The stranger enquired where I lived.
Direct.                The policeman said to us, ‘Where are you going?”
Indirect.              The policeman enquired where we were going.
Direct.                  He said, ‘Will you listen to such a man?’
Indirect.                He asked them whether they would listen to such a man. [Or] Would they, he asked, listen to such a man?
Direct.                   ‘Do you suppose you know better than your own father ?’ jeered his angry mother.
Indirect.                  His angry mother jeered and asked whether he supposed that he knew better than his own father.

Commands And Requests

105 . Commands (ఆజ్ఞలు) మరియు requests (విన్నపములు) మొదలగు వానిని report చేయునపుడు Indirect speech కొరకు ఒక verb ను వాక్యములో ప్రవేశపెట్టడం జరుగుతుంది. ఈ verb ఆజ్ఞను జారీచేయునదిగా గాని, విన్నపమును చేయునదిగా గాని ఉంటుంది. ఈ పరిస్థితిలో imperative mood (తప్పని సరియైనది విధిగా ఉండునది అను భావమును ఇచ్చునట్టిది) తన original భావమును వదలి infinitive (అనంతమైన భావమును ఇచ్చునది) గా మార్పుచెందును.
Direct.                      Rama said to Arjun, ‘Go away!
Indirect.                    Rama ordered Arjun to go away.
Direct.                      He said to him, ‘Please wait here till I return.’
Indirect.                    He requested him to wait there till he returned.
Direct.                      ‘Call the first witness,’ said the judge.
Indirect.                    The judge commanded them to call the first witness.
Direct.                        He shouted, “Let me go.”
Indirect.                     He shouted to them to let him go.
Direct.                        He said, ‘Be quiet and listen to my words.”
Indirect.                     He urged them to be quiet and listen to his words.

Exclamations And Wishes

106. ఆకస్మిక భావములను (exclamations) చేయునపుడు మరియు కోరికలను తెలియ జేయునపుడునూ, Indirect speech ని ఒక verb చేత ప్రవేశపెట్టడం జరుగుతుంది. ఆ verb భావమును గాని, కోరికను గాని తెలియజేయు పదమై ఉండవలయును.
Direct.                  He said, ‘Alas! I am undone.
Indirect                He exclaimed sadly that he was undone.
Direct                   Alice said, ‘How clever I am”
Indirect.                Alice exclaimed that she was very clever.
Direct.                   He said, “Bravo! You have done well.
Indirect.                 He applauded him, saying that he had done well.
Direct.                    ‘So help me, Heaven!” he cried, ‘I will never steal again’
Indirect.                  He called upon Heaven to witness his resolve never to steal again.

అభ్యాసము 104
ఈ క్రింది వాక్యములను Indirect Speech లోనికి మార్చండి :-
1. He said to me, ‘I have often told you not to play with fire’.
2 “You have all done very badly!’ remarked the teacher.
3. They wrote, ‘It is time we thought about settling this matter.”
4. The teacher promised, ‘If you will come before school tomorrow, I will explain ie
5. She wrote, ‘1 am waiting and watching and longing for my son’s return.”
6. The examiner’s orders were, ‘No one is to bring books into the room nor ask me questions about what I have told you to do.’
7. The dwarf said to her, ‘Promise me that when you are Queen you will give me your first-born child.
8.  ‘That is my horse,’ said he, ‘and if I do not prove it in a few minutes I will give up my claim!
9. ‘I will avenge your wrongs,’ he cried, ‘I will not enter Athens until I have punished the king who had so cruelly treated you!
10. He wrote and said, ‘I am unable to come just now because I am ill, but I will certainly start as soon as I am well enough to do so.
11. One day he sent for Cassim and said to him, “You are now old enough to earn your living, so you must set off, and make your own way in the world.

అభ్యాసము 105
ఈ క్రింది వాక్యములను Indirect Speech లోనికి మార్చండి :
1. “What do you’want?” he said to her.
2 He said, “How’s your father?’
3. ‘Are you coming home with me?’ he asked.
4. He enquired, When, do you intend to pay me ?’
5. He said to us, ‘Why are you all sitting about there doing nothing?”
6. ‘Do you really come from China?’ said the prince.
7. The poor man exclaimed, “Will none of you help me?”
8. ‘Which way did she go?’ asked the young Rakshas.
9. Aladdin said to the magician, ‘What have I done to deserve so severe a blow?
10. ” ‘Don’t you know the way home?’ asked I.
11. ‘Do you write in a good hand?’ he. said.
12. “Have you anything to say on behalf of the prisoner?” said the judge, finally.
13. ‘Which is the proper way to answer this question, father ?’ the boy enquired.
14, “Have you anything to tell me, little bird ?” asked Ulysses.
15. The young sparrow said, ‘Mother, what is that queer object?’
16. Then aloud he said, ‘Tell me, boy, is the miller within ?’
17. “Who are you, sir, and what do you want?’ they cried.
18. ‘Dear bird,’ she said, stroking its feathers, ‘have you come to comfort me in my sorrow?’
19. The Rajah was deeply grieved, and said to his wife, ‘What can I do for you?’
20. When the sun got low, the king’s son said, ‘Jack, since we have no money, where can we lodge this night?’
21. She said to him, “What is it that makes you so much stronger and braver than any other man ?”
22. When the Brahmin approached, the first thief said, ‘Why do you carry a dog on your back? Are you not ashamed?”

అభ్యాసము 106
ఈ క్రింది వాక్యములను Indirect Speech లోనికి మార్చండి :-
1. ‘Bring me a drink of milk,’ said the swami to the villagers.
2. ‘Sit down, boys,’ said the teacher.
3. ‘Halt!’ shouted the officer to his men.
4. ‘Take off your hat,’ the king said to the Hatter.
5. The teacher said to him, ‘Do not read so fast!
6. He said to me, “Wait until I come.’
7. ‘Hurry up,’ he said to his servant, ‘do not waste time.’
8. ‘Run away, children,’ said their mother.
9. He said, ‘Daughter, take my golden jug, and fetch me some water from the well.
10. ‘Go down to the bazaar. Bring me some oil and a lump of ice.’ ordered his master.

అభ్యాసము 107
ఈ క్రింది వాక్యములను Indirect Speech లోనికి మార్చండి :-
1. ‘What a rare article milk is, to be sure, in London !’ said Mr. Squeers with a sigh.
2. “What a stupid fellow you are!’ he angrily re-marked.
3. He said. “My God! I am ruined.”
4. He said, ‘Alas! our foes are too strong.
5. He said, ‘What a lazy boy you are! How badly you have done your work !’
6. ‘How smart you are!’ she said.
7. He said, ‘Oh’! that’s a nuisance.”
8. He said, ‘How cruel of him!”
9. He said, “What a pity you did not come l’
10. “Ah me !’ exclaimed the Queen, ‘What a rash and bloody deed you have done!”

Conversion Of Indirect Into Direct

107. Indirect Speech ని Direct Speech లోనికి మార్పు చెయ్యడానికి పెద్ద కష్టమేమీ ఉండదు. ఈ క్రింది examples ను పరిశీలించండి:-
Indirect.                  He inquired whether his name was not Ahmed.
Direct.                     He said to me, ‘Is not your name Ahmed ?”
Indirect.                  As the stranger entered the town, he was met by a policeman, who asked him if he was a traveller. He replied carelessly that it would appear so.
Direct                     As the stranger entered the town, he was met by a policeman, who asked, ‘Are you a traveller?’ ‘So it would appear; he answered carelessly.
Indirect.                 She asked how she, a girl, who could not ride or use sword or lance, could be of any help. Rather would she stay at home and spin beside her dear mother.
Direct.                   She said, ‘How can I, a girl, who cannot ride or use sword or lance, be of any help? Rather would I stay at home and spin beside my dear mother?”

అభ్యాసము 108
ఈ క్రింది వాక్యములను Direct Speech లోనికి మార్చండి :-
1. He asked Rama to go with him.
2. Rama replied that he could not do so.
3. He asked his father when the next letter would come.
4. His father replied that there might not be another that year.
5. Rama asked me what had become of Harl.
6. I told him that I had not seen him for months.
7. The master requested that they would attend carefully to what he was saying.
8. I wrote that I would visit him next day.
9. He observed that he had never liked doing that.
10. I told them to be quiet.
11. He asked me if I had anything to say.
12. Rama asked Hari if he would change places with him.
13. He said that he was tired, and that he wished to go to bed.
14.  An old mouse asked who would bell the cat.
15. John said that he wanted to be a soldier.
16. He asked me where I was going.
18. Abdul said that he had seen that picture.
17. He asked me what I wanted.”
19. The boy said that he would go with us.
20. He said that the earth moves round the sun.
21. The stranger asked Alice where she lived.
22. I asked Mary if she would lend me a pencil.
23. He told us that he had waited an hour.
24. The lady inquired if he was now quite well again.
25. He said that he had come to see them.
26. He said that though he had come, it was against his will.
27. The speaker said that it gave him great pleasure to be there that evening.
28. He asked them whether they would listen to such a man.
29. He asked me if I would accompany him.
30. He ordered him to leave the room and forbade him to return.
31. The mother asked het boy where he had been all the afternoon.
32. Hari asked Rama if he had read the letter.
33. The King asked the philosopher whom he considered the happiest man living.
34. The magistrate asked the prisoner what he was doing with his hand in the gentleman’s pocket.
35.  The fox cried out to the goat that a thought had just come into his head.
36. He advised his sons notto quarrel amongst themselves, when he was dead but to remain united.
37. The lion told the fox that he was very weak, that his teeth had fallen out, and that he had no appetite.
38. He replied that he had promised to reward his soldiers and that he had kept his word.

108. ఈ క్రింది వాక్యములను జాగ్రత్తగా పరిశీలించండి. Direct Speech నుండి Indirect Speech లోనికి మారుచున్నప్పుడు సంభవించిన మార్పులను జాగ్రత్తగా గమనించండి :-
Direct.              The Prince said, ‘It gives me great pleasure to be here this evening.”
Indirect.            The Prince said that it gave him great pleasure to be there that evening
Direct.                He said, ‘I’shall go as soon as it is possible.”
Indirect.            He said that he would go as soon as it was possible.
Direct.              He said, ‘I do not wish to see any of you; go away!
Indirect.           He said that he did not wish to see any of them and ordered them to go away.
Direct.              My teacher often says to me, ‘If you don’t work hard, you will fail.
Indirect.            My teacher often says to me that if I don’t work hard I shall fail.
Direct.               He said, “We are all sinners.”
Indirect.            He said that we are all sinners.
Direct.              The lecturer said, ‘Akbar won the respect of all races and classes by his justice.
Indirect.             The lecturer said that Akbar won the respect of all races and classes by his justice.
Direct.                He said, ‘Let us wait for the award.’
Indirect.              He proposed that they should wait for the award.
Direct.                ‘Saint George stike for us !’ exclaimed the Knight, ‘do the false yeomen give way?’
Indirect.              The Knight prayed that Saint George might strike for them and asked whether the false yeomen gave way.
Direct.                ‘Curse it l’exclaimed the driver. “Who could have foreseen such ill-luck? But for accident we should have caught the train easily.’
Indirect.              The driver exclaimed with an oath that nobody could have foreseen such ill-luck. But for the accident they would have caught the train easily.
Direct.                  The general, addressing his mutinous troops, said, ‘You have brought disgrace upon a famous regiment. If you had grievances, why did you not lay them before your own officers? Now you must first suffer punishment for your offence before their complaints could be heard.
Indirect.                The general told his mutinous troops that they had brought disgrace upon a famous regiment. If they had grievances, why had they not laid them before their own officers? Now they must suffer puishment for their offence before their complaints could be heard.
Direct.                     The traveller said, ‘Can you tell me the way to the nearest inn?” “Yes,’ said the peasant, ‘do you want one in which you can spend the night?’ ‘No,’ replied the                                              traveller, ‘I only want a meal.’
Indirect.                  The traveller asked the peasant if he coule tell him the way to the nearest inn. The peasant replied that he could, and asked whether the traveller wanted one in which he could spend the night. The traveller answered that he did not wish to stay there, but only wanted a meal.

Remark: examples es replied in the affirmative’ ‘replied in the negative అను wrong phrases ను వాక్యముల నుండి తొలగించాము.
28. He asked them whether they would listen to such a man.
29.  He asked me if I would accompany him.
30.  He ordered him to leave the room and forbade him to return.
31.  The mother asked het boy where he had been all the afternoon.
32.  Hari asked Rama if he had read the letter.
33. The King asked the philosopher whom he considered the happiest man living.
34.  The magistrate asked the prisoner what he was doing with his hand in the gentleman’s pocket.
35. The fox cried out to the goat that a thought had just come into his head.
36. He advised his sons notto quarrel amongst themselves, when he was dead but to remain united.
37. The lion told the fox that he was very weak, that his teeth had fallen out, and that he had no appetite.
38.  He replied that he had promised to reward his soldiers and that he had kept his word.

108. ఈ క్రింది వాక్యములను జాగ్రత్తగా పరిశీలించండి. Direct Speech నుండి Indirect Speech లోనికి మారుచున్నప్పుడు సంభవించిన మార్పులను జాగ్రత్తగా గమనించండి :-
Direct.                       The Prince said, ‘It gives me great pleasure to be here this evening.
Indirect.                    The Prince said that it gave him great pleasure to be there that evening.
Direct.                       He said, “I’shall go as soon as it is possible.
Indirect.                    He said that he would go as soon as it was possible.
Direct.                      He said, ‘I do not wish to see any of you; go away!
Indirect.                    He said that he did not wish to see any of them and ordered them to go away.
Direct.                      My teacher often says to me, ‘If you don’t work hard, you will fail.
Indirect.                    My teacher often says to me that if I don’t work hard I shall fail.
Direct.                      He said, ‘We are all sinners.’
Indirect.                    He said that we are all sinners.
Direct.                      The lecturer said, ‘Akbar won the respect of all races and classes by his justice.
Indirect.                    The lecturer said that Akbar won the respect of all races and classes by his justice.
Direct.                        He said, ‘Let us wait for the award.”
Indirect.                     He proposed that they should wait for the award.
Direct.                      ‘Saint George stike for us !’ exclaimed the Knight, ‘do the false yeomen give way?”
Indirect.                    The Knight prayed that Saint George might strike for them and asked whether the false yeomen gave way.
Direct.                      ‘Curse it l’ exclaimed the driver. ‘Who could have foreseen such ill-luck? But for accident we should have caught the train easily.’
Indirect.                    The driver exclaimed with an oath that nobody could have foreseen such ill-luck. But for the accident they would have caught the train easily.
Direct.                        The general, addressing his mutinous troops, said, “You have brought disgrace upon a famous regiment. If you had grievances, why did you not lay them before                                         your own officers? Now you must first suffer punishment for your offence before their complaints could be heard.
Indirect.                      The general told his mutinous troops that they had brought disgrace upon a famous regiment. If they had grievances, why had they not laid them before their                                           own officers? Now they must suffer puishment for their offence before their complaints could be heard.
Direct.                          The traveller said, ‘Can you tell me the way to the nearest inn?’ ‘Yes,’ said the peasant, ‘do you want one in which you can spend the night?’ ‘No,’ replied the                                               traveller, ‘I only want a meal.’
Indirect.                         The traveller asked the peasant if he coule tell him the way to the nearest inn. The peasant replied that he could, and asked whether the traveller wanted one in                                         which he could spend the night. The traveller answered that he did not wish to stay there, but only wanted a meal.

Remark: ‘replied in the affirmative’ 8 ‘replied examples in the negative అను wrong phrases ను వాక్యముల నుండి తొలగించాము.

అభ్యాసము 109
ఈ క్రింది వాక్యములను Indirect Speech లోనికి మార్చండి :-
1. Cheer up, mother, I’ll go and get work somewhere said, Jack.  I have taken pity on you and will help you.
2. But the sea-god cried, ‘Do not be afraid, noble prince.
3. ” ‘No,’ said the child; ‘I won’t kneel, for if I do, I shall spoil my new breeches.”
4. ‘What a horse they are losing for want of skill and spirit to manage him !’ exclaimed Alexander.
5. Telemachus replied, ‘How can I drive away the mother, who bore me and nourished me ?”
6. ‘Call no man happy, was the reply of the philosopher, ‘until he has ended his life in a fitting manner.
7. Then said the wolf to the fox, ‘Now either yield thyself as vanquished, or else certainly I will kill thee.”
8. ‘I believe,’ said he, that we are in this country among a people whom we like and who like us.’
9.  He said, “Take that bird away. Its gilded cage reminds me of my father whom I imprisoned.”
10. I have just one word to say to you,’ said the dealer. ‘Either make your purchase, or walk out of my shop!
11. ‘My hour is come, thought he. ‘Let me meet death like a man.”
12. ‘Be not cast down,’ said Mentor, ‘remember whose son thou art, and all shall be well with thee!
13.  Bhishma said: ‘Boys! boys! remember you playa game. If it be Arjuna’s turn let him have it.”
14. ‘Friends,’ said the old man, ‘sit down and rest yourselves here on this bench. My good wife Baucis has gone to see what you can have for supper.
15. ‘Ah! you don’t know what these beans are,’ said the man; if you plant them over-night, by morning they grow right up to the sky.
16. ‘How clever I am I’ he said. ‘All my life I have been talking prose without knowing it.’
17.  ‘I am old and lonely,’ said she. ‘Hast thou no pity on my lonelines? Stay with me, my best son, for thou art yet more boy than man.’
18. ‘I do not practise’, Goldsmith once said, ‘I make it a rule to prescrible only for my friends.’ ‘Pray, dear doctor,” said Beauclerk, ‘alter your rule, and prescribe only for your enemies!
19. He said: “Who are you to speak to me like this? I am the master. Why should I help you? It is your work, nof mine, to draw the art.
20. “I cannot hope to see these trees which I am planting come in perfection,” said the duke, ‘but it is right for me to plant for the benefit of my successors.
21. ‘Are you angry, my friends, said the king, ‘because you have lost your leader? I am your king; I will be your leader.
22. Said an old Crab to young one, ‘Why do you walk so crooked, child? Walk straight !'”Mother, said the young Crab, ‘show me the way, will you?’
23. ‘Who are you?” said the Deer. The Jackal replied: “I am Kshudrabuddhi the Jackal. I live in this forest all by myself; I have neither friend nor relation.
24. One summer some elephants were very much distressed by the heat, and said to their leader: “We are absolutely perishing, for want of water. The smaller animals have bathing-places but we have none. What are we to do? Where are we to go ?”
25. When the king saw him coming he said, ‘Pray’ who are you, and what do you. want?’ The Rabbit said, ‘I am an ambassador from His Majesty Chandra-the Moon. The Elephant King replied, ‘Declare your errand.’
26. A young Rajah once said to his Vizier, ‘How is it that I am so often ill ? I take great care of myself; I never go out in the rain; I wear warm Clothes; I eat good food. Yet I am always catching cold or getting fever.
27. ‘My sons,’ said he, ‘a great treasure lies hidden in the estate I am about to leave you.’ ‘Where is it hid ?” said the sons. ‘I am about to leave you.’ said the old man, ‘but you must dig for it.’
28. ‘How very well you speak French I’Lady Grizzel said. ‘I ought to know it, Becky modestly said. ‘I taught it in a school, and my mother was a Frenchwoman.
29. “What are you going to do with the .tinder-box?” asked the soldier. “That’s no business of yours! .said the witch; “You’ve got your money; give me my tinder-box.
30. ‘My name is Noman,’ said Ulysses, ‘my kindred and friends in my own country call me Noman.’ ‘Then,’ said the Cyclops, ‘this is the kindness I will show thee, Noman; I will eat thee last of all thy friends.’
31. I am a dead man, Hardy,’ said Nelson; ‘I am going fast; it will be all over with me soon. Come nearer to me. Let my dear Lady Hamilton have my hair, and all other things belonging to me.
32. He said to the shoemaker: “You are a big blockhead; you have done the reverse of what I desired you. I told you to make one of the shoes larger than the other, and, instead of that, you have made one of them smaller than the other!
33. I can extend no other mercy to you,’ said the Raja, ‘except permitting you to choose what kind of death you wish to die. Decide immediately, for the sentence must be carried out.’ I admire your kindness, noble Prince,’ said the jester, “I choose to die of old age.”
34. Her mother said, ‘You must go straight to your grandmother’s cottage and not loiter on the way. There is a wolf in the wood through which you are going; but if you keep to the road he won’t do you any harm. Now, will you be a good girl and do as I tell you?”
35. Next morning at breakfast his wife said to him, ‘George, I think I can tell what is amiss with our clock. “Well, what is it?’ he sharply asked. ‘It wants winding up,’ said his partner.
36. A fawn one day said to her mother, ‘Mother, you are bigger than a dog, and swifter and better winded, and you have horns to defend yourself, how is it that you are so afraid of the hounds ?” She smiled and said, ‘All this, my child, I know fully well; but no sooner do I hear a dog bark, than, someh,?” or other, ‘my heels take me off as fast as they can carry me.’
37. Said a young mole to her mother, ‘Mother, I can see.’ So her mother put a lump of frank incense before her, and asked her what it was. ‘A stone,’ said the young one. ‘O my child !’ said the mother, ‘not only do you not see, but you cannot even smell.’
38. “What are you doing, good old woman ?’ said the princess. ‘I’m spinning, my pretty child.”Ah, how charming ! Let me try if I can spin also.”
39. “You say, said the judge, that the bag you lost contained one hundred and ten pounds.’ ‘Yes, your honour, replied the miser. Then as this one contains one hundred pounds it cannot be yours.’
40. He answered slowly, ‘Alas! my dear son, why do you ask the one thing I cannot grant you? Your hands are too weak to rein those fiery beasts; you do not know the path. Come, ask something else, anything but that.
41. The speaker said, ‘I entirely object to the proposal. I object to it as founded on a wrong principle, and I object to it as highly inconvenient at this time. Have you considered all that this proposal involves? Gentlemen, I entreat you to be cautious.
42. Kausalya said to Rama, ‘Do not desire, 0 my child, to possess the moon, because it is thousands of miles off, and it is not a plaything for children and no child ever got it. If you wish I will bring some jewels that are brighter than the moon, and you can play with them.’
43. The hen bird was just about to lay, and she said to her mate: ‘Cannot you find me some place convenient for laying my eggs ?”And is not this,’ he replied, ‘a very good place for the purpose?’ ‘No,’ she answered. ‘for it is continually overflowed by the tide. “Am I, then, become so feeble, he exclaimed, ‘that the eggs laid in my house are to be carried away by the sea?’ The hen bird laughed and said, ‘There is some considerable difference between you and the sea.
44. A cat hearing thfit a hen was laid up sick in her nest, paid her avisit of condolence, and creeping up to her, said: “How are you, my dear friend? What can I do for you? What are you in want of .? Only tell me. Is there anything in the world that I can bring you? Keep up your spirits, and do not be alarmed.’ ‘Thank you,’ said” the hen. ‘Do you be good enough to leave me, and I have no fear but I shall soon be well.
45.  ‘Sweet child,’ he answered, ‘do not fret, for I can make you happier here than everyou could have been on the earth; I will give you beautiful things to play with, which a queen would envy. Rubies and diamonds shall be your toys, and your plates shall be of solid gold. All the beautiful things you see, belong to me, for I am king of this rich underworld.” But she only replied, ‘I was happy playing with the pebbles on the seashore, and I care only for the sparkle of the little waves on the shining sand. Here there are no flowers, no sun, and she wept anew.

Autobiographies : Definition & Types with Examples in Telugu

by

అధ్యాయము 41

Autobiographies
(స్వీయ చరిత్రలు)

ఒక వ్యక్తి యొక్క జీవిత చరిత్రను వేరొకరు రాస్తే, అట్టి దానిని Biography అని అంటారు. (e.g., Southey’s “Life of Nelson ” Boswell’s “Life of Johnson,” etc.) as , Autobiography eor. (e.g., John Stewart Mill’s “Autobiography”)
ఈ క్రింద ఇవ్వబడిన exercises లో విద్యార్థి తానే వేరొక వ్యక్తిలాగా, జంతువులాగా, ఒక వస్తువులాగా ఊహించుకొని autobiography రాయవలసిందిగా అడగడం జరిగింది. తానే ఒక జంతువు లేక వస్తువుగా ఊహించుకొని first person లో రాయాలి. (‘నేను’ అనే సర్వనామ పదాన్ని ఉపయోగించి)
స్వీయచరిత్ర చక్కటి సరళమైన భాషలో అంటే మనం మాట్లాడే వ్యవహారిక భాషలో ఉండాలి.

Specimen
1. The Autobiography Of A Euro

As soon as I entered this fascinating world I was looked upon with great expectations. The world was full of racism. Yet I was held in high esteem. People from the United States of America to Antartica looked at me as I soon rolled out from the parentage of Europeans.

Since economists, raging bulls and bears did not know much about me, I caught the apprehension of my parents, the share market holders, the financial experts, scholars, students and so all. On my birth I was placed on the lap of my mother the Federal Bank.

Frankly, my brother Lira, my sister sterling and my extended family members like the Deutsche Mark the Yen were quite jealous of me. I know my worth. I reveal this secret of mine hence forth. I am a form of money held or traded outsided the country, in whose currency its value is stated. In future I would be globally acceptable by the members of all the the nations.

Autobiographies Definition And Types with Examples in Telugu

I now take pride of place in the Euromarket, a financial market which deals with European currencies. I do not want to roll over but I’d love to be accepted by the developing as well as underdeveloped nations.

Read and Learn more Written Composition

2. The Autobiography Of A Horse

Now that I am getting old and stiff in the joints, I like to meditate, while grazing in the pasture, on my foal days. I think that was the happiest part of my life. I had no work to do, and could rui, about after my mother, who was a fine white Arab mare, without any restraint. Most of my time was spent in the fields, where I nibbled the tender grass and capered about, while my mother was steadily grazing.

But that could not last for ever. When I was old enough, the trainer came and, to my great indignation, fastened a long rope to my head, and then began driving me round and-round in circles with his long whip. 1 was frightened and angry, but he went on till 1 was so tired that I could scarcely stand. However, my mother told me that it was no use my resisting, and to make a long story short, I Was at last thoroughly trained as a riding-horse.

I was bought by a young officer as a polo pony, and I soon got to love the game. He was a kind master, and a good rider; and in the end I would do anything for him, and was quite proud when his side won the game. But he got into debt, and had to sell me; and I was bought by a gentleman and a lady who kept a buggy, and was trained to run in shafts. I hated this work; and I am afraid I gave a lot of trouble, by going as slowly as I could. When my driver gave me the whip, I started shying at any object on the road. And then I found that jibbing was a very good trick, and whenever I was whipped, I simply backed. My owner got disgusted at last, and sold me to a gentleman who was fond of hunting.

I was delighted to get back to saddle-work; and thoroughly enjoyed my gallops with the hounds after the jackal in open country. But an accident put a stop to that joily life; for one day my master pressed me to a big jump which I knew I could not do. I did my best but fell short, and fell. My master was thrown and broke his arm, and I badly sprained one of my legs.

I was in hospital for weeks, and then was sold to a gentleman who wanted a quiet riding-horse. He was a kind master, and used me well; and I was in his service for a good number of years. Now I am old, he gives me very little work, and I spend most of my time grazing in the pasture, and leading a quiet, contented life.

అభ్యాసము 152
క్రింది వాని autobiographies వ్రాయుము.
1. A Bee. (Read up something about the habits of hive-bees; then bring in the various duties of the worker- bee; feeding and tending larvae (young), strong honey, sweeping hive, guarding, fetching nectar from flowers to make honey, etc.)

2. An Ant. (On the same lines.)

3. A St. Bernard Dog. (Training as a puppy by monks of St. Bernard to rescue travellers lost in snow; describe the dog; sent out with flask of brandy fastened round its neck; some of the dog’s adventures.)

4. A Sheep Dog (Training by’the shepherd to look after flock; as young dog, imitates his mother in her work; learns to understand the shepherd’s sign and verbal orders; knows each sheep, and can pick out and bring whichever the shepherd wants; can separate certain numbers from others; drives sheep to pastures, and into fold at night: guards flock against enemies.)

5. An Elephant.– (Wild life in jungle when young; how caught in keddah by decoy; training; its work: carrying loads, piling logs, drawing carts, carrying hunters in tiger-shooting, marching in state processions, etc.)

6. A Rose Tree. [Early cultivation; the first pruning resented; learns later it is necessary for producing fine flowers; gets rich manure; learns that cultivation makes it different from wild rose; suffers from disease, like greenfly, blight, etc.; how gardener cures it; produces splendid red roses; much admired; next year, some blooms gain prize at Rower Show; cuttings taken (its children), etc.]

7. A Watch (Describe.-silver watch; in jeweller’s shop; other watches its companions; e.g., proud gold watch, humble gun-metal watch, repeating watches, wrist watches, etc. Bought as present for young man ; stolen out of his pocket; sold by thief; put in pawnshop; bought by man; falls sick and goes to hospital, i.e.. jeweller’s-new main spring.)

8. A River.– (Rises as spring in mountains, or from a glacier; mountain torrent, rocky bed, water-falls, tributaries, swollen when snow melts; reaches plains; slow steady river; cultivated fields on banks; irrigation canals taken off; passes villages and small towns; flows through a big town: pollution of waters; boats and ships; fall into sea at big port, etc.)

9. A Kite or Hawk.– (Young in a nest in a tall tree, fed by mother and fatherkite : how it learns to fly; hunting its prey-mice, chickens, small birds; teased by crows and minas; chooses mate; builds nest; etc.)

10. A Fish (Salmon). (Its youth as a smelt in river; journey to the sea; retums up river leaping weirs: chooses a mate; grows big; fished for; how it is deceived by bait; nearly hooked; escapes and vows to take no more baits; its enemies; proud of being king of river fishes, etc.)

అభ్యాసము 153
క్రింది వాని autobiographies వ్రాయుము.
1. A Camel.
4. A Tiger.
2. A Spider.
3. A Donkey.
5. A Seagull
6. A Kingfisher.
7. A Caterpillar and Butterfly.
8. A Computer.
9. A Robot.
10. A House.
11. A Motor-car.
12. An Aeroplane.
13. A Crocodile.
14. A Crow.
15. A Steamship.
16. A Cobra.
17. A Buffalo.
18. A Tractor.
19. A Child’s Toy.
20. A Rifle.

అభ్యాసము 154
క్రింది వాని జీవిత చరిత్రను స్వీయచరిత్రగా వ్రాయుము.
1. A Piece of Coal.
2. An Owl.
3. A Pariah Dog.
4. A Parrot.
5. A Coconut Tree.
6. A Banyan Tree,
7. A Television
8. Super Market
9. An airport.
10. A Stadium.

Dialogue-Writing : Definition & Types with Examples in Telugu

by

అధ్యాయము 42

Dialogue-Writing

Dialogue అనగా ఇద్దరు మనుష్యుల మధ్య జరిగే సంభాషణ. Dialogue writing కూడా composition వలెనే ఉంటుంది. అలానే ఉపయోగకరంగానూ ఉంటుంది. భారతీయ విద్యార్థులకు ఇంగ్లీషు నేర్చుకునే సందర్భములో Dialogue writing చాలా ఉపయోగపడుతుంది. వాడుక భాషలో మాట్లాడటం అలవడుతుంది.

తన భావములను సహజమైన ధోరణిలో వెలిబుచ్చడానికి Dialogue writing విద్యార్థులకు ఎంతో ఉపయోగకరంగా ఉంటుంది. భారతీయ విద్యార్థుల యొక్క spoken English bookish గా ఉండటం సహజం. అతనికి ఇంగ్లీషు ప్రజలతో మాట్లాడే అలవాటు ఉండదుగాబట్టి, Dialogue – writing అతనికి చాలా అవసరం మరియు ఉపయోగం.

Dialogue రాయడానికి కొంత dramatic power (నాటకీయత) చాలా అవసరం. ప్రశ్నను రెండు కోణాల నుండి అర్ధం చేసుకోవాలి. ఊహాజనితమైన ఇద్దరు వ్యక్తుల మధ్య మానసికంగా తాను నిలబడాలి. ఇద్దరికీ తానే ప్రతినిధి. తానే వ్యవహారకర్త.

ఆ ఇద్దరు వ్యక్తులు వాళ్ళవాళ్ళ వ్యక్తిత్వ స్వభావములకు అనుగుణంగా మాట్లాడునట్లు dialogue రచయిత చూసుకోవాలి. అనగా అతను ద్విపాత్రాభినయనం చెయ్యాలి.

వ్రాత పూర్వకముగా ఉన్న dialogue సహజంగా అప్పటికప్పుడు చెప్పినట్లు ఉండవలయును. బాగా ఆలోచించి రాసినట్లుగా బరువుగా ఉండరాదు. మాటలు సహజంగా ఉండాలి. కాని ఇదే సందర్భములో, రచనకు ఉపక్రమించే ముందు preparation ఎంతో అవసరం.

ఇలా తీవ్రమైన preparation చేసినట్లు dialogue మాటలలో కనిపించరాదు. రచయిత తన కళను కనిపించకుండా కప్పిపుచ్చడం ఒక కళ. ముందుగా ఒక plan వేసుకోవాలి. దాని ప్రకారం రాయాలి. ఇలా ముందు జాగ్రత్తలు తీసుకొకుండా ఠపీమని dialogue రాసినట్లుయితే అది గందరగోళంగా తయారవుతుంది. మనకు కావలసిన భావమంటూ ఏమీ ఉండదు.

Dialogue Writing Definition And Types with Examples in Telugu

Read and Learn more Written Composition

Method Of Procedure

1. Subject గురించి ముందుగా చాలా జాగ్రత్తగా ఆలోచించవలయును. తరువాత నీ ఊహాచిత్రంలో సంభాషించుచున్న ఇద్దరు వ్యక్తుల వాదనలను, సంభాషణ ప్రక్రియలను కాగితం పైన రాసుకొనవలయును.

2. నీవు పై విధంగా రాసుకున్న సంభాషణలను ఒక క్రమ పద్దతి (order) లో పేర్చుకొన వలయును. సంభాషణా కార్యక్రమంలో ఒక వాదం నుండి ఇంకొక వాదం పుట్టుకొస్తుంది. (వీనినన్నిటిని ఒక కూర్పుగా తయారుచేసుకుంటే ఒక outline వస్తుంది. ఈ కూర్పు dialogue రాయడానికి చాలా ఉపయోగపడుతుంది.)

3. Dialogue లోని ఇద్దరు వ్యక్తులలో ప్రతి ఒక్కరు ఏ బాణీలో మాట్లాడుతారో బాగా గుర్తించుకోవాలి. ఆ బాణీని చివరిదాక చెక్కుచెదరకుండా కాపాడాలి. ఆ ఇద్దరి వ్యక్తిత్వాలు సమతూకంగా చివరిదాకా నిలబడాలి (ఉదాహరణకు ఇచ్చట రెండవ speciman లో Swarup మాట్లాడే పద్దతిని, Dulip మాట్లాడే పంధాని బాగా గమనించండి. మీకు వ్యక్తుల మధ్య తేడా తెలుస్తుంది. Swarup మనిషి (పుస్తకాల పురుగు) Dulip కసరత్తు చేసే మనిషి).

4. Dialogue రాసిన తరువాత అది ఇద్దరు వ్యక్తులు మాట్లాడుకున్నట్లు సహజంగా ఉండాలి. ఊహాచిత్రంలోని ఇద్దరు వ్యక్తులు మాట్లాడే మాటలు తేలికగా అర్ధంకావాలి. వారి సంభాషణలు నీవు నిత్యం వినే సంభాషణలు వలె ఉండాలి. సహజంగా ఉండాలి. పుస్తకాలలోని బరువైన phrases పనికిరావు. ఇద్దరు స్నేహితులు మాట్లాడినట్లు ఉండవలయును.

Special Hints (ప్రత్యేక సూచనలు)

1. (a) మీ dialogue writing లో ఒక వ్యక్తికి అధిక ప్రాధాన్యత ఇవ్వరాదు. అలా అయితే అట్టి వ్యక్తి ఒక ఉపన్యాసం యిచ్చినట్లవుతుంది. సంభాషణలో ఇద్దరు సమానంగా పాల్గొనాలి. చురుగ్గా సాగాలి. బంతి దొర్లినట్లుగా ఉండాలి.

(b) మనం తరచూ వినే సంభాషణలలో మొదటి వ్యక్తి మాట్లాడేటపుడు రెండవ వ్యక్తి అడ్డుకుని అతని సంభాషణలోనికి చొచ్చుకుపోతాడు (మర్యాదగా). ఈ సహజధోరణిని మీ dialogue లో కూడా కొంతవరకు
పోషించాలి. ఉదాహరణకు:

A. “I am perfectly certain he would never do such a thing. Why, only the other day he told me”

B.- “I don’t care what he told you I know for a fact that he did it.”

(c) Dialogue లో మొదటి వ్యక్తి సమాధానాన్ని ప్రశ్న రూపంలో ఇవ్వడం కొన్ని సందర్భాలలో సంభవిస్తుంది. కొన్ని సార్లు రాబోయే ప్రశ్నను ముందుగానే ఊహించుకొని తన సమాధానాన్ని advance గా ఇవ్వడం కూడా “సహజం. వీనిని dialogue లలో చొప్పించడం ద్వారా దానిలో సహజత్వం తొణికిస లాడుతూంది.
ఉదాహరణకు:

(1)
A.-“What will you do if he does not answer your letter?”
B.-“Well, what would you do ?”

(2)
D.-“I heard something about you the other day, John.”
J.- “I know! You are going to ask me why I was absent from office last Monday. Well, I will tell you-etc.”

(d) మనం తరచు వినే dialogues లో ఆశ్చర్యార్థకాలు వినిపిస్తుంటాయి. అక్కడక్కడ యివి నీకు కూడా నీ రచనలలో కొంతవరకు ఉపయోగపడును. ఈ సందర్భాలలో అవకతవక పదాలు వాడరాదు.

2. Dialogue చాలా interesting గా ఉండాలి. ఈ విషయం ప్రత్యేకంగా చెప్పనక్కరలేదు. చదివే వ్యక్తి ప్రారంభం నుండి చివరిదాకా రచనకు హత్తుకునేలా వుండాలి. ఎంత సహజంగా, interesting గా రాసినా, చిట్టచివరలో ఒక సందేశం ఉండాలి. Dialogue sudden గా ముగింపుకు రాకూడదు. Dialogue లో కూడా opening sentence తరువాత last sentence చాలా ప్రాధాన్యతను సంతరించుకుంటాయి.

3. మాట్లాడుకునే సాధారణ భాష వాడవలయునంటే grammar ను అవతలపెట్టమని అర్ధం కాదు. మంచి ఇంగ్లీషునే వాడాలి.
“He asked my brother and I to tea,” మరియు “Can I give you an advice?” ఇట్లాంటి వాక్యాలు తప్పుగా పరిగణింపబడతాయి.

4. ఈ సూచనలను దృష్టిలో పెట్టుకోండి. సహజమైన dialogue రాయండి. అది interesting గా ఉండాలి. సహజమైన ధోరణిలో ఉండాలి. మొత్తం conversation క్లుప్తంగా ఉండాలి. ప్రశ్నలు, సమాధానాలు క్లుప్తంగా, సూటిగా ఉండాలి.

Specimens (నమూనాలు)

1. A conversation between two boys, one of whom is habitually despondent and thinks that luck is against him, whereas the other is of a more practical turn of mind.
Nasarullah Jan.- Come, Hussain, you are taking your failure too much to heart. I know it is a great disappointment, and I sympathize with you; but you must not allow it to make you so unhappy.
Mohd. Hussain. It is all very well for a lucky chap like you, Nasarullah. You have passed the first time, and this is my second failure. You would not feel so cheery if you were in my place.
N.J.-I know, but you must pull yourself together, and make up your mind. You will pass next time. Remember the old saying “If at first you don’t succeed, try, try, again!”
M.H. – I think the other version of the saying has more sense in it,”If at first you don’t succeed, quit, quit, quit,
at once i
N.J.-Oh nonsense I You’ll never do anything if you don’t persevere. Now why do you think you failed? M.H.- All this year fate has been against me. First, I was ill with enteric, which lost me a whole term. Then just before my examination, my father died, and that so upset me that I could not prepare properly. N.J.-Well, you certainly did have bad luck, I am sorry. But I am sure you will succeed next time; so you must make up your mind to win through.
M.H.- It’s no use. I think I was born unlucky. I seem to fail in everything I touch. I tried several times to get a scholarship, but some other boy always got it instead. I shall give it up.
N.J. Indeed, you must not. Remember it’s the darkest hour before the dawn. Often when things are at the worst, they begin to improve. I don’t believe in all the talk about bad and good luck. A brave man makes his own luck. You have a year before you; you have brains, and if you will only pull yourself together and put your heart into your work, you will win through.
M.H. I wish I had your disposition. Still, I will take your advice and have another try.
N.J. That’s the style 1 And I am sure you wilf succeed and break your so-called “bad luck” once for all. An imaginary conversation between a bookish student and an athletic student on the comparative merits of mental and physical culture.

2. Dulip Singh. Hello, Swarup! Swotting away as usual. Come out, man; shut up your old books, and come an have a game of tennis.
Swarup. I am sorry I cannot do that, Dulip. The examination is drawing near, and I want every hour I can get for study.
Dulip Singh- Ohl hang all examinations! I do not worry about mine. What is the use of them, any way? Swarup.-Well, you can’t get a degree if you don’t pass the examination; and I have set my heart on being aB.A. Dulip Singh. And pray what good will be a B.A. ? Do you? You may get a clerkship in a government office; but that’s all. And there are hundreds of fellows who have got their degrees, and are no nearer getting jobs of any sort. Swarup.-That may be so; but I am not studying so much to pass my examination and obtain my degree, as to store my mind with knowledge and develop my intellectual faculties.
Dulip Singh. My word! How fine you “highbrows” can talk ! ‘Develop my intellectual faculties,” I tell you, all a man wants to get on in the world is some brains, plain common sense, and plenty of push. And you can’t learn these things from books. And while you are “developing your intellectual faculties,” you are spoiling your health. You will soon be a thin, white, narrow-chested, half-blind weakling if you stick to your beloved books like this. Look at my broad chest and feel my biceps! Anyway, I am developing my physical powers with my games and athletics.
Swarup. Well, if I have to choose, I would rather have a learned and cultivated mind than a strong and well- developed body for the mind is far more important than the body.
Dulip Singh-Oh! I see ! You mean to say that a man who plays football and hockey and is as strong as a horse, cannot have any brains?
Swarup. I did not say that; but you may remember what Kipling said about “muddied oafs and flannelled fools.” Dulip Singh. Well, I must say you are very complimentary ! Kipling must have been an ass if he said that.
Anyway I would rather be “a muddied oaf” than a whitefaced, spectacled book-worm, as blind as an owl. Their teacher (coming in).-Hello! What are you two fellows quarreling about? [They explained.]
Teacher. I see. Well, you are both right and both wrong. Swarup, a little more physical exercise will do you good and will not interfere with your mental culture; and Dulip Singh, a little more study will not in any way spoil your physical strength. So, go and have a game of tennis, Swarup; and afterwards’you, Dulip. settle down to a few hours’ study.

3. A dialogue between a countryman and a townsman, bringing ouf the comparative advan- tages of town and country life.
Smith – Good morning, Mr. Jones. It is a long time since I saw you in town. Are you staying long?
Jones-Good morning. No, Mr. Smith, I only came up on business for a few hours, and hope to get home again this evening.
Smith. Running away so soon? Why not stay a few days and enjoy yourself?
Jones.-Not me. I don’t find much enjoyment in the smoky air of a town, and all its noise and racket. Give me the clean air, the sunshine, and the quiet of the country.
Smith. Well, I grant you have the advantage of purer air in the ountry; but as for noise, you soon get used to it. In fact, I could not stand your quiet-it would drive me crazy. I like to feel plenty of life and movement
about me.
Jones. Really? Why, I could not get a wink of sleep in a noisy town. And towns are so ugly-nothing to see but ugly smoke-grimed houses, dreary streets, hideous advertisements on every hoarding, factory chim- neys belching smoke, and a dull, smoky sky. I have the beauty of the green fields and shady woods and flowery meadows of the country.
Smith-Ah I my friend, but do not forget what Dr. Johnson said: “When you have seen one green field you have seen all green fields; come with me down Fleet Street and study man.”
Jones. – Well, all I can say is that Dr. Johnson never saw a green field in his life, or he would have known that there is an infinite variety in nature if you have the eyes to see it.
Smrth. But what in the world do you do with yourser in your village ? It must be a very dull and slow lile, with no theatres, no concerts, no cinemas, no public lectures, no exciting political meetings. You must lead a stupid vegetable life, like a cabbage.
Jones. Not so stupid and dull as you imagine. I have my garden, which is a great source of pleasure; and there is fishing, and a little hunting. And then I love tramping over the hills, and seeing the beautiful scenery. And in the evenings I have my books.
Smrth.-Well, every man to his taste; but to me yours would be a dull life.
Jones.-Dull or not, it is much healthier. In the pure country, we do not get the epidemics and dirt-produced diseases you have in the towns. And our quiet habits give us longer lives.
Smrth-Yes, you may live longer in the country. But you don’t get so much out of life as we do in town. A short life and a merry one, I say.

4. A dialogue between two boys discussing their hobbies.
George. I am in luck, Will. My uncle has just sent me a letter from Japan, where he is on business, with some Japanese stamps. He knows I collect them and often sends me foreign stamps from the places he visits.
Will. They look rather nice. Are you going to paste them in your album ?
George-Yes, here it is. I have got quite a nice collection now.
Will. What a lot! French, Italian, Dutch, German, American, Turkish. You seem to have some from almost every country.
Georgre.-Oh there are a lot I have not got yet. And some rare ones are very expensive, and cost pounds of
money.
Will. But what is the use of collecting stamps ?
George.-Oh I Well, it’s a hobby. And it teaches you some geography; and sometimes it brings money.
Will. How is that?
George-Why, a really good collection sometimes sells for hundreds of pounds. Why don’t you go in for stamp- collecting?
Will-I like something more active. My hobby is collecting ferns and wild flowers. And to get these you have to go long country walks, and explore the woods, and climb the hills. It is quite an adventure when you find a rare plant or fern in some wild place.
George.-Bul what do you do with them when you get them ?
Will.- I press them, and then mount them neatly on sheets of paper, and name them. I have got quite a nice collection.
George. How do you press them?
Will. I lay the fern or plant between sheets of blotting-paper, and put them in a press, or under a board with heavy weights. You have to change the blotting-paper every day, and in about a week the plant is dried and pressed, and will last like that for years.
Georgre. And what is the good of your hobby?
Will. Well, it teaches me a lot of botany; and takes me into beautiful country; and does me good physically, because it means exercise in the open air.

5. A dialogue between a master and a pupil on public speaking.
Master.-Well Ram Narain, I hear you are taking part in the speaking competition.
Pupil.-Yes, Sir; and I came to ask you to give me some hints on the art of the public speaking.
Master. With pleasure, Ram Narain. Have you prepared your speech?
Pupil-Yes, Sir; and now I am learning it by heart.
Masfer.-Oh I but that is a great mistake. Always carefully prepare what you want to say, but never try to learn it off by heart.
Pupil.-But why, Sir?
Master. Because when you are speaking, you should watch your audience to see whether they are following what you say. You can see by their faces whether they understand and are interested; and if they are not, you can then win their attention by adding, or emphasizing, or changing something. But if your speech is learnt by heart, you can’t alter it.
Pupil.-But it seems so much easier to learn it.
Master. It is not so in the end. Memorising is a great strain. Also, if you forget one sentence, you may break down altogether.
Pupil. Well, I might manage if I could have my notes with me when I speak.
Master.-At first you may lake a short note of outline, or main points, of your speech, lest you should forget; but when you get used to speaking in public, il is best to do without notes altogether.
Pupil. But if I don’t use notes, and must not learn my speeches off by heart how can I remember what to say? Master. You must prepare carefully, and think ouf what you want to say; and learn the main points, or outline, of your speech. Then, when you get up to speak, you will find that the words will come.
Pupil. But I feel so nervous when I have to speak.
Master. That is natural, especially at first. But as you get used to speaking in public, you will overcome that. Even practised speakers often feel very nervous before they begin to speak; but when they get on to their feet, they forget all about it.
Pupil. When I am nervous, I think I speak too fast.
Master. Well, you must practise speaking slowly and distinctly. And don’t shout-it strains your voice and prevents people hearing you; and don’t speak too low. Speak naturally, so that all can hear.
Pupil.- Thank you, Sir, for your hints. I will try to follow them.

6. A dialogue on the choice of a profession — law or medicine.
Jai Dyal.- Thank goodness! our examinations are over at last.
Sain Das.- What a relief! I hope I shall pass; for I have just got a letter from my father promising to send me to the Medical College if I get through Class 12. Jai Dya/.-Oh ! are you going to be a doctor?
Sain Das. Yes; and I am very glad. My father is a doctor, you know, and I have always wanted to be one too. It seems a very interesting profession. What are you going to do?
Jai Dyal.- My ambition is to be a lawyer, and when I have got my B.A., I am to go to the Law College to study for my LL.B.
Sain Das.- Law! That never had any attractions for me. Why do you want to be a lawyer?
Jai Dyal. – Well, it is a very respectable profession. One can be a gentleman and hold a good position, any way.
Sain Das. So can a doctor. The medical profession is just as respectable as the legal. Jai Dyal.-Oh! yes, of course. But I think a lawyer can make more money than a doctor.
Sain Das.-I am not so sure of thai. A few lawyers who get to be leaders of the bar, of course, do make fortunes. But what about the crowd of pleaders and even barristers who can scarcely make a living? The law is terribly overcrowded.
Jai Dyal. Oh well, there is always plenty of room at the top, you know.
Sain Das. What I like about the medical profession, apart from its scientific interest, is that the work is so humanitarian. A doctor is always doing good to his fellows relieving suffering, curing diseases,
restoring health, and so making folk happy. This makes a doctor’s life a sort of social service. Jai Dya/-Well, a lawyer is doing good work too. He is helping to detect and prevent crime, defending the innocent from false charges, and helping people in distress.
Sain Das.-Yes; but a lawyer’s life is full of temptations. He is tempted to defend criminals for big fees, and to get them off from just punishment. I don’t see how a lawyer can help being a liar, too! Jai Dyal. Now you are joking. It is as possible for a lawyer to be an honest man as it is for a doctor to be a rogue.

అభ్యాసము 155
ఈ క్రింది topics పై dialogue లు రాయండి:

1. Between a father and his son on thrift.
(Hints – The son has been wasting his allowance extravagantly and got into debt; his lather rebukes him, and warns him of the danger of extravagance, telling him how to spend economically, and save for his old age.)

2. Between a temperance advocate and a young man on the evils of intemperance.
(Hints The young man sees no harm in drinking; argues it is a jolly social custom, makes him lively and happy, drowns care, revives him when tired, is a manly habit, etc. The temperance man warns him against danger of becoming a drunkard; the terrible power of the drink craving; argues alcoholic drink is a slow poison, and damages health; appeals to him to set an example to others by signing the pledge.etc.)

3. Between a soldier and a shopkeeper on the merits of their respective occupations.
(Hints The soldier argues that his is a noble profession; superior to civilian in rank; calls for courage and manly qualities; he is the defender of his country; whereas a tradesman’s job is mean and despised; no job for a man, etc. The shopkeeper argues that the soldier produces nothing; he simply destroys; it is a butcher’s job; food for powder, etc.; whereas the tradesman is a useful member of society, who is doing a public service; can become rich, while a soldier must always be poor, etc. The dignity of labour.)
4. Between a huntsman and a gardener on their respective pursuits.
(Hints-The huntsman defends his sport as manly, exciting, and needing courage; tries to show the benefits others by killing pests like tigers and bears; says gardening is a tame and effeminate hobby. The gardener argues hunting is a cruel spori; it means killing and torturing many of God’s innocent creatures; purely destructive. Whereas he is productive; making two blades of grass grow where only one grew before ; making the world more beautiful. (Mnte.-The refining effect of gardening.)

అభ్యాసము 156
ఒక్కో topic పై ఒక్కో dialogue రాయండి : –
1. Between a horse and an ass.
2. Between a cage-bird and a crow.
3. Between a pen and a pencil.
4. Between a pet-dog and a pariah-dog.
5. Between a film actor and yourself.
6. Between an aeroplane and a railway-train.
7. Between a fountain-pen and a lead pencil.
8. Between an oil-lamp and an electric-lamp.
9. Between a spider and a fly.
10.  Between Cinderella and her two sisters just before the ball.

 అభ్యాసము 157
ఈ క్రింది సమస్యలపై చిన్న dialogue రాయండి.
1. The president of B.C.C.I. and you.
2. The fable of “The Lion and the Mouse.”
3. ” The table of “The Blind Man and the Lame Man.”
4. The fable of “The Country Mouse and the Town Mouse.
5. The fable of “The Dog in the Manger.”
6. The fable of ‘The Ant and the Grasshopper.”
7. The fable of “The Wolf and the Lamb.”
8. Between ordinary foodand fast food
9. A clinic and tele medicine.
10. A blood bank and multiple organ donor bank.
11. Commerce and e-commerce.

అభ్యాసము 158
ఒక్కో topic పై ఒక్కో dialogue రాయండి : –
1. Between two friends about dreams.
2. Between a miser and a spendthrift.
3. Between a railway-guard and an engine-driver.
4. Between two class-fellows about the visit of the Inspector.
5. Between two boys discussing their hobbies.
6. Between a credulous man and an impostor.
7. Between two friends on a topic of common interest.
8. Between two friends-the one a believer, and other a disbeliever, in ghost stories.
9. Between two boys about the approaching examination.
10. Between two class-fellows on a poem they have read in the class.
11. Between a hypochondriac and his friend.
12. Between two boys who have just come out of the Examination Hall.
13. Between two friends who have lost their way in a jungle.
14. Between two friends discussing holiday plans.
15. Between two friends about their neighbours.
16. Between two boys caught in a shower on their way from school. One looks on the matters, and the other on the dark side.
17. Between two friends on life in flats..
18. Between two friends discussing the “theatre-manners” of latecomers, who mar the pleasure of the audience.
19. Fan and an airconditioner.
20. An earthquake and a cyclone.

అభ్యాసము 159
ఈ క్రింది సమస్యలపై చిన్న dialogue రాయండి.
1. The use and abuse of athletics.
2. The advantages and disadvantages of solitude.
3. The uses and abuses of advertisement.
4. The advantages and disadvantages of cheap literature.
5. The pleasures and perils of speed.
6. The pleasures and disadvantages of life in a school hostel.
7. The advantages and disadvantages of life in a great city.
8.  The influence of the Cinema.
9. The necessity to save Religious Institutions.
10. The advantages and disadvantages of life in a great city.
11. The influence of Television Channels
12. Terrorism and Fanaticism.

అభ్యాసము 160
ఈ క్రింది topics యొక్క మంచి చెడులను మరియు సాధకబాధకాలను dialogues రూపంలో చర్చించండి.
1. Prohibition.
2. Alms-giving.
3. Corporal punishment.
4. The caste system.
5. Luck.
6. The United Nations.
7. Lotteries.
8. Hand-industries.
9. Asceticism.
10. Geography as a class-subject.
11. Entrance Examinations.
12. Making Global Friendship through the-Internet.
13. Awards and Recognitions.

అభ్యాసము 161
ఈ క్రింది topics ను dialogues రూపంలో చర్చించండి.
1. Is luxury an evil?
2. Is poverty a handicap?
3. Which should be the medium of education in our school-English or the vernaculars?
4. Ought everyboy to become a Scout?
5. Which is worse-flood or fire?
6. Which should we use in a big town-well water or tap-water?
7. Which is better-hockey or cricket?
8. War-is it necessary?
9. Which is better-to wear out or to rust out?
10. Should Hygiene be made a compulsory school-subject?

అభ్యాసము 162
ఈ క్రింది dialogues ఇంకా కొంచెం పొడిగించి పూర్తి చెయ్యండి : –
Krishna – Hurrah! only ten days to the holidays!
Rama. – I know. I have been counting the days. I am just sick of school.
Krishna.- So am I. What are you going to do with yourself in the holidays?

Patient. – Good morning, doctor! Can you spare me a few minutes?
Doctor. Certainly! Come in and sit down. Now, what is the matter with you?

Abdul. What is that roaring noise? It sounds like a train.
Kabali. More likely an aeroplane. Yes! Up there! Six of them.
Bepin. Oh, yes! They seem to be a great height up.

Feroz Din- Well, Abdul Latif, only three weeks more to the Matriculation examination!
Abul Latif – Yes, it is coming very near now. I wish it were all over.
F.D. So do I! And then, no more school.
A.L. Hurrah! What are you going to do when you leave school, Feroz Din ?

Father – I am sorry to hear you have failed the examination, Hah.
Hari. – So am I, father; it was just my bad luck. Look at Govind-lucky fellow! He passed in the second division.
Father-So you think it is all a matter of good luck and bad luck ?

Rashid – Here is a puzzle for you, Ghuiam; which would you rather be-a sick millionaire or a healthy beggar?
Ghulam-Well, that wants some thinking over. I suppose you mean, which is more important for our happiness-health or wealth?

Bepin So you object to corporal punishment in schools?
Ramesh – Yes, I do. I think it ought to be abolished.
Bepin – But why?

Expansion Of Passages : Definition & Types with Examples in Telugu

by

అధ్యాయము 39

Expansion Of Passages

ఈ exercise, Precis-writing exercise కు పూర్తిగా భిన్నమైనట్టిది. Precis writing లో passage ని క్లుప్తం చెయ్యాలి. ఇచ్చట పెంపుచెయ్యాలి. ఒక వాక్యమునుగాని, passage ని గాని తీసుకొని దానిలో ఇమిడివున్న అంతర్గత భావాన్ని వెలికి తీసి, దానికి మరికొన్ని వివరణలు, ఉదాహరణలు కలుపుకుంటూపోవాలి. ఇలా ఇచట ఒక చిన్న passage ను (వ్యాసాన్ని) తయారుచేసినట్లవుతుంది. ఈ పెంచే ప్రక్రియకు ప్రత్యేకమైన rules అంటూ ఏమీలేవు. పెంచి తయారుచేసిన passage మరీ చిన్నదిగా ఉండరాదు. మరీ essay (వ్యాసము) తరహాలో పెంచరాదు. రమారమీగా ఎనభై గాని వందగాని పదములు ఉండవచ్చును.

Method Of Procedure

1. మాతృకగానున్న (original passage) ని గాని sentence ని గాని బాగుగా చదువవలయును. దాని అర్థం పూర్తిగా అవగాహన కావలయును. ప్రధానమైన భావమును ఒక్క మాటలోగాని ఒక్క phrase లోగాని యిమిడ్చి ముచ్చటగా చెప్పడం మంచిది.

2. ఈ విధంగా passage యొక్క సందేశము పూర్తిగా అర్థమైన తరువాత, దానిని పెంచడానికి ప్రయత్నం ప్రారంభించవలయును. ఈ దశలో వివరాలు (details) illustrations, proofs, examples మొదలైన వానిని సమకూర్చవలయును. ఇప్పుడు paragraph సైజులో ఒక నమూనా తయారవుతుంది.

3. మొదటి passage లో ఉన్న వివరణలు అన్ని రెండవ passage లో తప్పని సరిగా ఉండును. ఇంకను కూడా వివరణలు కలుపవచ్చును. కాని అవి మొదటి passage లోని ప్రధాన సందేశమునకు అనుకూలముగా ఉండవలయును. (Specimen no. 3 చూడండి)

4. విపులీకరించి రాయుటకు ఎంచుకొనిన వాక్యములో సంపూర్ణభావము ఉండవలయును. దీనిని నిరూపించవలసినది రచయిత బాధ్యత.

5. ఆ వాక్యము metaphor (ఉపమానాలంకారము) అయి ఉన్నచో, దాని భావమును simple భాషలో వివరించి, కారణములను వివరించవలయును.

6. పెంచి రాసిన passage ఒక పూర్తి composition లాగు ఉండవలయును. Good english లో రాయవలయును. Original passage కంటె బాగుగా అర్థమయ్యేరీతిలో ఉండవలయును. రాసిన తరువాత మరల ఆ copy ని తిరిగి పరిశీలించవలయును. ఏ భావమును, పదమును వదిలి వేయరాదు.

7. Spelling తప్పులు, grammar తప్పులు, punctuation తప్పులు ఏవైనా ఉంటే సరిదిద్దుకోవలయును.

Expansion Of Passages Definition And Types with Examples in Telugu

Read and Learn more Written Composition

Species (కొన్ని నమూనాలు )
-1-

A great deal of talent is lost in the world for the want of a little courage.

Expansion
Self-Confidence

Timidity and self-distrust are almost as great faults as conceit and over-confidence. There are many people who have real talent in different lines, and yet who never accomplish anything, because they are afraid to make the first venture; and in this way good and useful things are lost to the world. A reasonable amount of confidence in one’s own powers is necessary for success.
If I were a cobbler, it would be my pride

-2-

The best of all cobblers to be:
If I were a tinker, no tinker beside
Should mend an old kettle like me.

Expansion
Pride In One’s Work

It is a great thing to take a pride in our work. Anything that is worth doing at all, is worth doing well. Even in the humblest task we should be ambitious to do it as well as we can, if possible better than anyone else. For example, a cobbler should not think that because his job is a humble one, it can be scamped and done anyhow he should be determined to make better shoes than any other cobbler; and a tinker should take pride in mending even an old kettle better than any other tinker can.

-3-

Let thy secret, unseen acts,
Be such as if the men thou prizest most
Were witnesses around thee.

Expansion
Toward Goodness

A Greek sculptor, when he was asked why he carved the backs of his statues, which no man would ever see, as carefully as he carved the front, said: “The gods will see them !” So it is not enough for us to live outwardly good lives while in secret we allow evil in our hearts, for God knows even if men do not! We should never do in secret what we should be ashamed of doing in the presence of our most valued friends.

-4-

However mean your life is, meet it and live in it; do not shun it and call it hard names.

Expansion
Making The Best Of Life

Men who are always grumbling about their poverty, complaining of their difficulties, whining over their troubles, and thinking that their lot in this world is mean and poor, will never get any happiness out of life or achieve any success. However mean our life may be, if we face it bravely and honestly and try to make the best of it, we shall find that after all it is not so bad as we thought: and we may have our times of happiness and the joys of success. There is nothing common or unclean, until we make it so by the wrong attitude we adopt towards
Peace hath her victories.
No less renowned than war.

-5-

Expansion Of Passages
The Victories Of Peace

The word victory is generally associated in our minds with war, and calls up visions of battles, bloodshed, and conquest by force and we think of war as a glorious thing because of its famous victories and splendid triumphs. But when we think of the achievements of great men statesmen, scholars, social reformers, scien- tists, philanthropists, .explorers, discoverers and honest workers-for the betterment of the human race and the progress and civilization of the world, we realize that the victories of peace are even more glorious than the victories of war.

అభ్యాసము 149
క్రింద ఇచ్చిన ప్రతి భావాన్ని విశదీకరింపుము.
1. It is a great loss to a man when he cannot laugh.
2. Charity is a universal duty, which it is in every man’s power sometimes to practise.
3. Slow and steady wins the race.
4. He who follows two hares catches neither.
5. A great city is, to be sure, the school for studying life.
6 Mid pleasures and palaces though we may roam, Be it ever so humble, there’s no place like home.
7. The noblest men that live on earth, Are men whose hands are brown with toil.
8. Where there’s a will there’s a way.
9. Perseverance is the very hinge of all virtues.
10. Honour and shame from no condition rise: Act well your part; there all the honour lies.
11. They are slaves who dare not be in the right with two or three.
12. Great talkers are never great doers.
13. The crown and glory of life is Character,
14. Life indeed would be dull, if there were no difficulties.
15. Only the actions of the just smell sweet, and blossom in their dust.
16. Tell me not, in mournful numbers, Life is but an empty dream.
17. The real dignity of a man lies, not in what he has, but in what he is.
18. He that is humble, ever shall Have God to be his guide.
19. What is this life, it lull of care, We have no time to stand and stare?
20. Home-keeping youths have ever homely wits.
21. To anyone who wishes to amend his life there is no time like the present.
22. Whatever is worth doing it all, is worth doing well.
23. Train up a child in the way he should go.
24. Custom reconciles us to everything. Nothing was ever achieved without enthusiasm.
26. Houses are built to live in and not to look on.
25. Do the work that’s nearest, Though it’s dull at whiles, Helping when we meet them, Lame dogs over stiles.
27. The good are always the merry, save by an evil chance.
28. Each man’s belief is right in his own eyes.
29. The heights by great men reached and kept, Were not attained by sudden flight; But they, while their companions slept, Were toiling upwards in the night.
30. One crowded hour of glorious life. Is worth an age without a name. Breathes there the man with soul so dead Who never to himself hath said, This is my own, my native land?
31. Full many a gem of purest ray serene The dark unfathomed caves of ocean bear;
32. Full many a flower is born to blush unseen, And waste its sweetness on the desert air.

The Appreciation Of Poetry : Definition & Types with Examples in Telugu

by

అధ్యాయము 43

The Appreciation Of Poetry

Poetry అంటే ఏమిటి? Poetry అంటే ఏమిటి అనే విషయంపై చాలా మంది చాలా రాశారు. కాని ఎవరూ కూడా దానిని పూర్తిగా వివరించలేకపొయ్యారు. Poetry seems to elude all attempts to describe it. కాని ఏదో కొంత మనం poetry ని గురించి తెలుసుకోవాలి. దాని వలన కనీసం కొంతలో కొంత మనకు ఆ subject ను గురించి తెలుస్తుంది. దాని ప్రధానమైన లక్షణాలు అవగాహన లోనికి వస్తాయి.

Poetry కి verse కి మధ్యనున్న సంబంధాలు ముందు చర్చిద్దాం. Poetry యొక్క form ను verse అంటారు. రచయితలు verse form లో poetry ని రాస్తారు. కొన్ని poetry కాకుండానే verses ఉంటాయి. verses poetry యొక్క body గా ఉంటవి.

Verse ని ఒక ప్రత్యేక బాణీలో రాస్తారు. Verse formation కు prose formation కు చాలా తేడా ఉంటుంది. Verse చెవి మాత్రమే. కన్ను కాదు. Verse ను చదివినపుడు దానికీ prose కూ ఉన్న తేడా తెలుస్తుంది. Verse అంటే ఒక విధంగా శ్లోకము అని కూడా అర్ధం చెప్పుకొనవచ్చును. ఇచ్చట ఆ తేడాలు
గమనించండి:

The Appreciation Of Poetry Definition And Types with Examples in Telugu

Read and Learn more Written Composition

(a) “The untrodden snow lay all bloodless on Linden, when the sun was low;
and the flow of Iser, rolling rapidly, was dark as winter.”

(b) “On Linden, when the sun was low, All bloodless lay the untrodden snow: And dark as winter was the flow Of Iser, rolling rapidly.”
భావములో మాత్రము పై రెండు passages ఒకే విధంగా ఉన్నవి. పదాలు కూడా ఒకే రకం.

(c) ఇచ్చట Campbell’s poem అయిన “Hohenlinden” ఉన్నది. No. (i) అదే మాటలు ఇచ్చట కూడా ఉపయోగింపబడ్డాయి. కాని చదివేటప్పుడు తేడా తెలుస్తుంది..
ఈ తేడాల యొక్క వివరణ ఇలా ఉంటుంది.

(1) Regular Rhythm: Rhyme ను చదివేటప్పుడు regular beat of sound వినిపిస్తుంది. అది soldiers యొక్క marching (కవాతు) వలె ఉంటుంది. Dancing చేయు నాట్యకత్తెల అడుగుల సవ్వడిలా (Foot work) ఉంటుంది. Prose విభాగంలో పాద ధ్వని లాంటిది ఉండదు. Rhyme లో కవి syllable ధ్వనులను ఒక ప్రణాలిక ప్రకారం సమాంతర దూరాలలో arrange చేస్తాడు. మొదటి line లో ఈ sound syllables ను italics print లో పెడితే ఇది అర్ధమౌతుంది. ప్రతి రెండవ syllable ధ్వనిని మొదటి దాని కంటె పెంచుకుంటూ పోవాలి. అప్పుడు rhythm చక్కగా వస్తుంది.
“On Linden when the sun was low”
Poetry లో శృతి పెరగడం తగ్గడం, అవి చక్కని విరామముల మధ్య వినబడటం ఇదంతా కూడా dance program లో ధ్వనులు పెరుగుదల తరుగుదల వలె ఒక బాణీ ప్రకారం జరుగుతుంది. దీనినే rhythm అంటారు. ఈ rhythm అనునది verse లో ప్రధానపాత్ర వహిస్తుంది.

(2) Rhyme : Stanza మొదటి మూడు lines చివర ఒకే sound ఉండవలయును. (low, snow, flow etc.) పదములకు ఒకే vowel sound ఉండి, ఒకే consonant sound తో అంతమైనపుడు rhyming sound వచ్చును.

ఉదా: keep, peep, jump, lump; hate, late, crew, few ; glide, slide మొదలైనవి. verse కు rhyming arrangement అక్కరలేదు. ఎందుకంటే సాధారణంగా verse లోనే rhyming arrangement ఉంటుంది. Rhyme కు రెండు ప్రధాన లక్షణములు ఉన్నవి. అది ఆహ్లాదకరమైన స్వరాలు కల్పించడం ద్వారా verse ను సంగీతమయం చేస్తుంది. ఈ arrangement ద్వారా verse చాలా కాలం మనగలుగుతుంది.

Stanzas కొన్ని పేజీలలోనున్న “The Daffodils” ను చూడండి. Verse ఎలా ఉంటుందో అర్ధమౌతుంది. Poem యూనిట్లుగా విభజింపబడి యుండటం, ఆ units అన్నీకూడా ఒకే form లో ఉండటం గమనించగలరు. ప్రతి unit కు ఆరు lines ఉన్నవి. మొదటి line కు మూడవ లైనుకు rhyming arrangement ఉన్నది. రెండవ దానికి 4వ దానికి same arrangement ఉన్నది. ఈ units ను stanzas అంటారు. చాలా వరకు poetry ని stanzas form లోనే రాస్తారు.

Verse ప్రధానమైనది rhythm. తరువాత rhythm మరియు stanzas కలిసి ఉండవచ్చును. ఈ నిబంధనలలో rhythrn చాలా అవసరం. Verse లేక poetry గాని rhythm లేకుండా ఉండదు. చాలా poems విషయంలో rhyme మరియు stanza forms ఉన్నప్పటికి, ఇవి poetry కి తప్పని సరిగా అవసరం అని చెప్పడానికి వీలులేదు. చాలా poems blank verse form లో రాయబడినవి ఉన్నవి. ఈ blank verse లో ప్రతి line లో పది syllables ఉంటాయి. కాని వాటికి చివర rhymes ఉండవు.

ఇంతవరకు మనం verse కు poetry ఉన్న సంబంధాలను గురించి తెలుసుకున్నాం. అసలు poetry అంటే ఏమిటో ఇప్పుడు తెలుసుకుందాం :-

(1) Music – Poetry లో ప్రధానమైనది verbal music. Poet స్వతహాగా ఆహ్లాదకరమైన ధ్వనులను ఇచ్చే పదాలను select చేసుకుంటాడు. మాటలను ఒకదాని పక్కన ఒకటి అమరిక చేయునపుడు వాని శృతిలో (sound) పరస్పర ఏకత్వం ఉండునట్లు చూసుకుంటాడు. దీనినే word music అంటారు. కధా వస్తువునకు (subject) సమతూకంగా ఉండేటట్లు ఈ word music ను సరిదిద్దుకుంటాడు. ఈ musical sound కు కధావస్తువు యొక్క భావానికి ఇలా సమతూకం ఏర్పడుతుంది. ఈ సమతూకం వలన poet యొక్క భావం మనకు బాగా అవగాహన అవుతుంది.

Verbal music అనేది కేవలం words యొక్క musical sound పైననే కాక rhythm (పద ధ్వనుల అమరిక పైన కూడా ఆధారపడుతుంది. చక్కని పదాల తియ్యని స్వరాలు ఆహ్లాదకరమైన rhythm కలిపి poetry కి music ను అందించును. ఇచ్చట Dryden రాసిన “Song for St. Cecilia’s Day” అనే poem నుండి రెండు verses ఉన్నవి. First verse లోని rapid rhythm అచట వివరించిన war alarm ను చక్కగా చూపించినది. రెండవ line లోని ప్రశాంతమైన rhythm అచట ఉన్న ఆహ్లాదకరమైన soft music కు
సరిపోయింది.
“The trumpet’s loud clangour
Excites us to arms,
With shrill notes of anger,
And mortal alarms.
The double double double beat
Of the thundering drum
Cries, Hark! the foes come;
Charge, charge, ’tis too late to retreat
The soft complaining flute,
In dying notes, discovers
The woes of hopeless lovers,
Whose dirge is whisper’d by the warbling lute.”
ఇచ్చట poets తమ music effects ఎలా సాధిస్తారు అనే విషయం పరిశీలిద్దాం:

(a) Rhyme : పదాలు ఒక దానికొకటి కలిసి సంయుక్తంగా rhyme చేసినపుడు musical sound వస్తుంది. ఇందువలననే poetry లో rhyming ను విస్తృతంగా వాడతారు. ఈ verse లో ఉన్న rhyme ను చూడండి
“Strew on her roses, roses,
And never a spray of yew,
In quiet she reposes:
Ah I would that I did too!”
(M. Arnold)
Internal rhymes (అనగా ఒకే line లో rhyming effect ను సృష్టించుట) ఇవి కూడా చక్కని musical
effect ను సృష్టించును.
‘The ice was here, the ice was there,
The ice was all around:
It cracked and growled, and roared and howled.
Like noises in a swound !”
(Coleridge)

(b) Vowel and Consonant Sounds : Open vowels మరియు soft consonant ను కలిగియున్న words (like_i, m, n, v, w z etc., ) చక్కని, మృదువైన మరియు ఆహ్లాదకరమైన music ను సృష్టించును.
“Season of mists and mellow fruitfulness.”
‘Then in a wailful choir the small gnats mourn.” “To dream and dream, like yonder amber light.”. “The murmurous haunt of flies on summer eves.”
(Keats) (Keats)
(Tennyson) (Keats)

(c) Onomatopoeia – ఒక పదము యొక్క sound నేరుగా అర్థాన్ని ఇచ్చునపుడు, అట్టి figure of speech ని ఈ పేరుతో పిలుస్తారు.
e.g., roar, bang, crash, clap, bump, bubble, screen, pop, moan, hum, murmur etc., Poet శబ్దముల గురించి మాట్లాడేటప్పుడు సందర్భాన్నిబట్టి ఆయా పదాలను ఉపయోగిస్తాడు. ఉదాహరణకు :-
The moan of doves in immemorial elms
And murmuring of innumerable bees.”
(Tennyson)
పైన ఇవ్వబడిన poem పావురాల కుహకుహులు, తుమ్మెదల జుంకారాలు వినిపిస్తుంది కదా? සුයි ఎలా సాధ్యం? Onomatopoeia శబ్దాలైన moan, murmur వలన సాధ్యమయ్యింది. consonants అయిన ‘m’ మరియు ‘n’ శబ్దాల (e.g.. immemorial, innumerable) వలన ఇంకా వినసొంపుగా ఉంది.

(d) Alliteration – ఇది ఇంకొక రకం figure of speech. దీనిని poetry లో వాడతారు. ఇది ఒకే consonant తో ప్రారంభమయ్యే రెండు పదాలను ఒకే చోటికి చేర్చుతుంది.
“The fair breeze below, the white foam flew                                      (Coleridge)
The furrow followed free.”
ఇచ్చట ‘ f’ sound గాలివీచే sound కు చక్కని పోలిక ఉంది.
“I hear lake water lapping with tow sounds by the shore.”                (Yeats)
ఉదాహరణకు :
ఇచ్చట ‘I’ sounds మరియు ‘sh’ sounds అచ్చటి చిన్న చిన్న అల శబ్దాలకు సరిపోవుచున్నవి.
A reeling road. a rolling road, that rambles round the shire.”            (Chesterton)
ఇచ్చట ‘ ‘ sound అచ్చటను పొడవాటి రోడ్డున వర్ణించడానికి ఉపయోగపడింది.

(e) Repetition-  కొన్ని phrases ను గాని కొన్ని పదాలనుగాని repeat చెయ్యడంవలన భావాన్ని విపులీకరించడానికే కాక musical ప్రభావాన్ని కూడా పెంపొందించును.
“The woods decay, the woods decay and, fall.”                              (Tennyson)
“What hope of answer, or redress?
Behind the veil, behind the veil..”                                                    (Tennyson)
“A wearytime! A weary time !
How glazed each weary eye !”                                                        (Coleridge)
“In ever climbing up a climbing wave”.
“The western tide crept up along the sand.                                    (Tennyson)
And o’er and o’er the sand.”
And round and round the sand.”                                                      (Kingsley)

(f) Refrains – Refrain కూడా ఒక విధమైన repetition అవుతుంది. కొన్ని verses లో ఒక line ను A line లోని భాగాన్ని గాని మరల repeat చెయ్యడం జరుగుతుంది. దీనిని burden or refrain అంటారు.

(2) Vision. (దృక్పథము) Poetry లో రెండవ ప్రాధాన్యత కలిగినటు వంటిది. గొప్ప కవికి తన దృష్టిని బహుదూరము సారించగల శక్తి ఉంటుంది. సత్యాన్ని అతడు తీవ్రంగా అన్వేషించి గమనించగలడు. ఆధ్యాత్మికమైన దృష్టి అతని ఆలోచనలో ఉంటుంది. మామూలు వ్యక్తులు బాహ్యప్రపంచాన్ని తమ పంచేంద్రియములతో గమనించగలరు. పంచేంద్రియములకు అతీతమైన భావాలను వారు గ్రహించలేరు. కాని కవులు తమ అంతర్మథన శక్తి ద్వారా కనిపించే దృశ్యాలకు అవతల ఉన్న అనేక సత్యాలను గ్రహించగలరు. అనేక విషయాలను వారు తమ సూక్ష్మదృష్టితో గ్రహించగలరు. ఉన్నతశ్రేణికి చెందిన కవిత్వము యావత్తూ కూడా, కవి యొక్క ఊహాజనితమే. Wordsworth సృజనాత్మకత లేని వ్యక్తిని గురించి ఒక పద్యం రాశారు. అతని పేరు Peter Bell. తన కంటికి కనిపించునది తప్ప ఇంక దేనినీ చూడలేదు అని ఇచ్చట భావము. అతనికి ఒక దృక్పథము అంటూ ఏమీలేదు.
“A primrose by a river’s brim
A yellow primrose’ was to him,
And it was nothing more.”
Primrose అనునది ఒక ఎడారి పూవు. దానిని గురించి Wordsworth గారు ఇలా రాశారు:
To me the meanest flower that blows can give
Thoughts that do often lie too deep for tears.
Poet వాస్తవానికి వ్యక్తిత్వాన్ని ఇస్తాడు. మామూలు సంఘటనలను, వస్తువులను మనం పరిశీలనా దృష్టితో చూడడానికి అతను మనకు తోడ్పడతారు. ఒక వాక్యాన్ని చూడండి :
“Apparelled in celestial light, the glory and the freshness of a dream.”

గొప్ప కవులు రాసిన poetry లో ఒక సందేశము ఉంటుంది. ఆ కవిత్వములో చెప్పిన దాని కంటే ఎంతో దానిలో దాగి ఉంటుంది. ఒకటి రెండు సార్లు చదివితే గాని దానిలోతు మనకు అంతుపట్టదు.

(3) Imagery : ఊహాజనితమైన చిత్రాలను మనం images అని అంటాము. నేర్పుగా పదాలను వాడినపుడు దీనిని imagery అని అంటాము. కంటికి కనిపించని భావాలను కవి కంటికి కనిపించునట్లు poetry లో చూపగలడు. ఇది అతని ఊహాశక్తికి నిదర్శనం. వచన కావ్యముకంటే, poetry ఈ పాత్రను గొప్పగా పోషించగలదు. Poetry కేవలం మాటలతోనే కాకుండా pictures తో మాట్లాడుతుంది. Poet యొక్క pictures వాస్తవ ప్రపంచం నుండి మనస్సులో గీసిన చిత్రాలు. మానసికమైన ఊహాచిత్రాలను మూడు విధాలుగా చిత్రిస్తాడు.

(a) By Description (వర్ణన ద్వారా): ఇతర prose writers వలెనే కవికూడా తన వర్ణనను మాటలతోనే చేస్తాడు. ఇచట Gray గారు రచించిన ఒక వర్ణన చూడండి:
‘The curfew tolls the knell of parting day.
The lowing herd wind slowly o’er the lea, The ploughman homeward plods his weary way. And leaves the world to darkness and to me. Now fades the glimmering landscape on the sight, And all the air a solemn stillness holds. Save where the beetle wheels his droning flight,
And drowsy tinklings lull the distant folds.”
(పద ప్రయోగములతో చేసిన వర్ణనల కొరకు ఈ క్రింది poem చూడండి. “The Sands of Dee” (2nd verse); “Hohenlinden”, “Rain in Summer.”)

(b) By certain Figures of Speech such as simile, metaphor, and personification about which you have learnt in Chapter 29. మీరు చదివినట్లుగా figures of speech కి చెందిన simile, metaphor మరియు personification అను వర్ణనలపైన గూడా poetry తన భావోన్నతికి ఆధారపడుతుంది. Poet ఎప్పుడు కూడా ఒక దానిని పోల్చిచెప్పడానికి ఇంకొక దానిపై ఆధారపడతాడు. ఇచ్చట image ని (ఊహాచిత్రాన్ని) ఆధారంగా తీసుకుంటాడు.

(c) By Picturesque Epithets. కవి మనస్సులో ఒక కీలక పదం ద్వారా గాని, phrase ద్వారాగాని, తన ఊహాచిత్రాన్ని నిర్మిస్తాడు. ఇచ్చటనున్న adjective epithets ను చూడండి. (సార్ధక నామము) :
“All in a hot and copper sky,
The bloody sun, at noon.”                                        (Coleridge)

పై రెండు lines లో ఉన్న రెండు epithets ఆకాశము యొక్క colour ను ఎంత చక్కగా వర్ణించినవి ! (4) Emotion. (ఉద్వేగము) : Emotion అనునది poetry కి ప్రధానంగా కావలసిన మూడవ అంశము. Prose రచనలో ఎక్కువ భాగము మెదడుకు సంబంధించిన వాటిలో కేంద్రీకరించి ఉంటుంది. Poetry హృదయంపై కేంద్రీకరించి ఉంటుంది. ఇది prose కు, poetry కు ఉన్న తేడా. కావున poetry ఉద్వేగాన్ని అనగా భావోద్వేగాన్ని హృదయంలో పెంపొందిస్తుంది. ఈ క్రింది lines ఉద్వేగం లేకుండా ఎవరు చదవగలరో
చూడండి
“And the stately ships go on
To their haven under the hill;
But O for the touch of a vanish’d hand,
And the sound of a voice that is still!”                     (Tennyson)

కాని ఉద్వేగమే ఉద్వేగాన్ని పెంపొందిస్తుంది. కవిత్వాన్ని అల్లేటప్పుడు కవి యొక్క భావనా ప్రపంచంలో ఏ మాత్రం ఉద్వేగం రాకపోయినా కవిత్వంలో ఉద్వేగం ఉండదు. కావున పాఠకులలో కూడా చలనం ఉండదు. సంక్షిప్తంగా చెప్పాలంటే, poetry కా ప్రధానంగా కావలసినవి music (భావయుక్తమైన సంగీతము) vision (ఒక దృక్పధము), emotion (ఉద్వేగము). కావున poetry తన imagination (ఊహాశక్తి) నుండి ఉద్భవిస్తుంది; ఉద్వేగంతో ఉవ్వెత్తున పైకి లేస్తుంది. ఒక సంగీత పరమైన మాటల సమ్మేళనంతో తన భావాన్ని వెలిబుచ్చుతుంది. Poetry కి అమాంతం మనం పూర్తి నిర్వచనాన్ని ఇవ్వలేము. దాని ప్రధాన లక్షణాలేమిటో వానిని మాత్రం
వివరించగలం.

Wordsworth గారు రచించిన “Daffodils” ను ఇచ్చట పరిశీలిద్దాం: I wandered lonely as a cloud
That floats on high o’er vales and hills,
-When all at once | saw a crowd,
A host of golden daffodils. Beside the lake, beneath the trees, Fluttering and dancing in the breeze. Continuous as the stars that shine
And twinkle on the milky way. They stretched in never-ending line Along the margin of a bay: Ten thousand saw I at a glance
Tossing their heads in sprightly dance. The waves beside them danced, but they Outdid the sparkling waves in glee;
A Poet could not but be gay
In such a jocund company!
I gazed – and gazed-but little thought
What wealth the show to me had brought.
For oft when on my couch I lie
In vacant or in pensive mood,
They flash upon that inward eye
Which is the bliss of solitude;
And then my heart with pleasure fills,
And dances with the daffodils.

Appreciation Of The Poem
(పద్య రచన యొక్క అవగాహన)

(1) Substance. మొదట పద్యాన్ని పూర్తిగా చదవాలి. తరువాత మనలను మనం ఈ విధంగా ప్రశ్నించుకోవాలి. ఇదంతా ఏమిటి? ప్రధానాంశం ఏమిటి? కవి ఏమి చెబుతున్నాడు?

ఒక రోజు కవి ఒక సరస్సు పక్కగా నడుస్తూ ఉంటాడు. వసంత ఋతువు. చల్లనిగాలి ఆహ్లాదకరంగా వీచుచున్నది. ఒక దృశ్యాన్ని చూస్తాడు. దాని అందం అతనిని ఆనందంతో ముంచెత్తుతుంది. హృదయం ఉప్పొంగి పోతుంది. కొన్ని వేల daffodils పుష్పాలు అతని మనోనేత్రాన్ని తెరుస్తాయి. పక్కనే చెఱుక్కుమని సరస్సులోని నీరు పరుగెత్తుతూ ఉంటుంది. దీనిని కవి “Fluttering and dancing” గా వర్ణిస్తాడు. Fluttering అనగా యిచ్చట రెపరెపలాడుట. అతను సంతోషంలో మునిగిపోతాడు. కాని ఆ సమయంలో అతనికి ఇతంతా తన జీవితానికి భాగస్వామ్యం అని తోచదు. తరువాత చాలా సార్లు ఈ దృశ్యం పదేపదే అతని మనోనేత్రం ముందు సాక్షాత్కరిస్తుంది. అతన్ని తన్మయత్వం చేస్తుంది.

(2) Language. ఈ daffodils poem చాలా simple భాషలో ఉంటుంది. పదగాంభీర్యం ఏమీ లేదు. Daffodils యొక్క Lilly జాతి మొక్కకు చెందినది. ఈ మొక్కలు బ్రిటన్ లోని చిట్టడవులలో పెరుగుతాయి.

(3) Imagery.
(a) మొదటి మూడు పద్యాలలో అనంతమైన daffodils సరస్సు పక్కన నేలపై పరిచినట్లు ఉన్న దృశ్యం వస్తుంది. సూర్యకిరణాలు వాని పైబడి అవి మిణుక్కు మిణుక్కు మని మెరుస్తూ ఉంటాయి. మొక్కలు గాలికి ఊగుతూ సూర్యకాంతిలో మెరుస్తూ నాట్యం చేస్తున్నట్లుగా ఉంటుంది.

(b) ఇచ్చట రెండు similes ఉన్నవి. Simily (simile అనగా ఉపమానాలంకారము) ఒంటరిగా ఉన్న మబ్బు, ఏకాంతముగానున్న కవి, మొదటి దశ. అనంతముగా కంటి చూపు ఆనినంత వరకు నేలపై పరచినట్లుగా ఉన్న daffodils దృశ్యము మరియు ఆకాశమంతా నిండిన అనంతకోటి నక్షత్రాల సమూహము రెండవ దశ. ఈ వర్ణన రెండవ పద్యములో ఉంటుంది..

(c) అదే రెండు, మూడు పద్యములలో personification (ఒక అచేతనమైన వస్తువును person గా గుర్తించి చెప్పుట) భావము కూడా ఉన్నది. ఇచ్చట daffodil పుష్పాలు ఆనందోత్సాహముతో తలలు ఆడిస్తూ మనుష్యులలాగా ఊగిపోవుచున్నవి అని అర్థం.
ఒకే సారి పదివేల పుష్పాలను చూశాను అంటాడు కవి. దీనిని English లో hyperbole అంటారు. ఇది కవి వర్ణణాంశంలో సహజంగా ఉండే అతిశయోక్తి. దానిని సారస్వతంగా తీసుకోవడానికి వీలులేదు.

(4) Sound effects
(a) మొదటి stanza లోని 6వ line లోని సత్వర భావానికి (quickness) దానికి ముందున్న lines లోని ప్రశాంతతకు ఉన్న తేడా ఎంతో poetic భావాన్ని ఇస్తుంది.

(b) నాలుగవ stanza లోని 6వ line లో alliteration భావము ప్రస్ఫుటంగా కనిపిస్తుంది. Alliteration అనగా రెండు పదములలోని మొదటి అక్షరములు అదే శబ్ధమును వినిపించుట. Ex. “And dances with the daffodils”. 3వ stanza లో 5వ line లో గూడా ఇదే భావం ఉండడాన్ని గమనించండి. Ex. “I gazed- and gazed’ ఇచ్చట కవి ఎంత సేపు అచ్చట నిలబడి తన్మయత్వం చెందినది మనకు indirect గా తెలియుచున్నది.

(5) Striking lines. Striking lines అనగా భావాన్ని కొట్టవచ్చినట్లు మనముందు పెట్టు lines అని అర్థం. మొదటి stanza లో 3, 4 lines ఈ భావాన్ని మనకు అందిస్తున్నవి. Inward eye (అనగా అంతర్గత మనో నేత్రము) మనకు ఒక mental picture ను అందించుచున్నది. ఇటువంటి mind pictures (మానసిక చిత్రములు) మనము ఒంటరిగా ఉండి చదువుచున్నపుడు ఎంతో ఆనందాన్ని ఇవ్వగలవు.

“The Daffodils” కు ఇచ్చట మనము ఒక సుదీర్ఘమైన అవగాహన ఇచ్చినాము. ఒక poem ఎలా పరిశీలనా దృష్టితో చదవాలో ఎలా రసాస్వాదాన్ని అనుభవించాలో ఇచ్చట మనకు చక్కగా బోధపడుతుంది. కాని high school level లో ఇంత విపులీకరణ అవసరం లేదు. ఒక విద్యార్థికి ఎంత అర్థం అయిందో తెలుసుకోవడానికి ఈ క్రింది ప్రశ్నలు చాలును :

(a) Poem యొక్క ప్రధాన భావము ఏమిటి?
(b) ప్రకృతిపైన, జీవితముపైన poet అభిప్రాయాలు ఎట్టివి?
(c) ఈ కొన్ని lines యొక్క భావము (annotation) ఏమిటి?
(d) Sound effects ఎలా కవి చిత్రించాడు (పదముల శబ్ద కలయిక)
(e) ఏవిధమైన figures of speech కవి ప్రయోగించినాడు?
(f) పై వానిని ఎలా వివరించాలి?
(g) మీరేమైనా ప్రత్యామ్నాయ title ను ఇవ్వగలరా? (alternative title)

Specimens (నమూనాలు)

Here are two short poems with certain questions on appreciation given below each of them and the answers worked out.
(a) She dwelt among the untrodden ways
Beside the springs of Dove;
A maid whom there were none to praise And very few to love.
A violet by a mossy stone
Half-hidden from the eye!
Fair as a star, when only one
Is shining in the sky.
She lived unknown, and few could know When Lucy ceased to be;
But she in her grave, and, oh,
The difference to me

W. Wordsworth

ప్రశ్నలు

1. Give a suitable title to the poem.
2. Name and explain the figure of speech used in the second stanza.
3. Which lines in the poem show intense feeling? What feeling has the poet expressed in these lines?
4. What do you think of the language used in the poem?

సమాధానములు

1.’The Lost Love” or “She Dwelt Among the Untrodden Ways.”
2.  The figure of speech is simile. The girl is compared to the half hidden violet and the lonely star to emphsise (a) her solitude and obscurity, and (b) her beauty of soul as well as body.
3.  The last two lines. They express the feeling of love and bereavement.
4. The most striking feature of the language is its simplicity. The poet has used simple, everyday words, mostly of one syllable; yet they produce a poem that has a magic charm.

(b) Laugh and be merry, better the world with a song.
Better the world with a blow in the teeth of a wrong.
Laugh, for the time is brief, a thread the length of a span.
Laugh and be proud to belong to the old proud pageant of man.
Laugh and be merry: remember, in olden time,
God made Heaven and Earth for joy. He look in a rhyme,
Made them, and filled them with the strong red wine of His mirth. The splendid joy of the stars; the joy of the earth.
So we must laugh and drink from the deep blue cup of the sky. Join the jubilant song of the great stars sweeping by, Laugh, and battle, and work, and drink of the wine outpoured
In the dear green earth, the sign of the joy of the Lord.
Laugh and be merry together, like brothers akin,
Guesting awhile in the rooms of a beautiful inn,
Glad till the dancing stops, and the lilt of the music ends.
Laugh till the game is played: and be you merry, my friends.

John Masefield

ప్రశ్నలు

1. What is the central idea of the poem ?
2. What is the “blow” with which the poet wants us to better the world?.
3. Quote three striking examples of metaphors used in the poem.
4. Explain: (a) “the old proud pageant of man.”
(b) “Guesting while in the rooms of a beautiful inn.”

సమాధానములు

 

1. Life is short and we must therefore laugh and be cheerful, and enjoy all the beauty and happiness that can be found on this earth.
2 It is our laughter and merriment that will serve as a blow and hit out boldly against wrong and injustice in the world.
3. (a) “Laugh, for the time is brief, a thread the length of a span.”
(b) “Made them and filled them with the strong red wine of His mirth”
(c) “Laugh till the game is played.”
4. (a) We are part of the spectacular progress of mankind which is marked with many glorious achievements..
(b) We should be happy and cheerful together during the short time we are in this beautiful world in the same way as brothers who are staying for a short while in a beautiful inn where there is dancing and music.

అభ్యాసము 163
ఈ క్రింది poems ను చదవండి. అచ్చట ఉన్న ప్రశ్నలకు సమాధానాలు రాయండి.
Read each of the following poems and answer the questions set below it
1. What is this life if, full of care,
We have no time to stand and stare?
No time to stand beneath the boughs And stare as long as sheep or cows.
No time to see, when woods we pass, Where squirrels hide their nuts in grass. No time to see, in broad daylight, Streams full of stars, like skies at night? No time to turn at Beauty’s glance,
And watch her feet, how they can dance?
No time to wait till her mouth can Enrich that smile her eyes began ?
A poor life this if, full of care,
We have no time to stand and stare.

William Henry Davies

(a) What kind of life does the poet condemn ?
(b) What are the “stars” of which the streams are full ?
(c) Name and explain the figures of speech in lines 9-10.
(d) Explain: “No time to wait till her mouth can

Enrich that smile her eyes began”.

2. My days among the Dead are past;
Around me I behold,
Wherever these casual eyes are cast, The mighty minds of old;
My never-failing friends are they,
With whom I converse day by day:
With them I take delight in weal And seek relief in woe;
And while I understand and feel How much to them I owe,
My cheeks have often been bedew’d
With tears of thoughtful gratitude.
– Robert Southey

(a) What is the central idea of the poem ?
(b) Who are the “mighty minds” ?
(c) Who are the poet’s friends and how are they never-failing?
(d) Explain: My cheeks have often been bedew’d

With tears of thoughtful gratitude.”

3. We scatter seeds with careless hand-
And dream we ne’er shall see them more:
But for a thousand years
Their fruit appears
In weeds that mar the land,
Or healthful store.
The deeds we do-the words we say
Into still air they seem to float;
We count them ever past-
But they shall last,
In the dread judgement, they
And we shall meet I
(a) What is the central idea of the poem ?
(b) Explain the imagery of the first stanza.
(c) Show how wrong we are about the consequences of our words and our deeds.
(d) Explain: “In the dread judgement, they

And we shall meet.”

4. Oh, sweet content, that turns the labourer’s sweat
To tears of joy, and shines the roughest face;
How often have I sought you high and low And found you still in some quiet place;
Here in my room, when full of happy dreams
With no life heard beyond that merry sound
Of moths that on my lighted ceiling kiss
Their shadows as they dance and dance around;
Or in a garden, on a summer’s night
When I have seen the dark and solemn air
Blink with the blind bat’s wings, and heaven’s bright face Twitch with the stars that shine in thousands there.
(a) Where does the poet seek sweet content? Where does he find it?
(b) What striking word-pictures are contained in the poem ?
(c) Name and explain the figures of speech in the last two lines.
(d) Give a suitable title to the poem.

5. Much have I travell’d in the realms of gold
And many goodly states and kingdoms seen;
Round many western islands have I been
Which bards in fealty to Apollo hold.
Oft of one wide expanse had I been told.
That deep-brow’d Homer ruled as his demesne; Yet did I never breathe its pure serene Till I heard Chapman speak out loud and boid;
Then felt I like some watcher of the skies
When a new planet swims into his ken;
Or like stout Cortez, when with eagle eyes He stared at the Pacific- and all his men Look’d at each other with a wild surmise Silent, upon a peak in Darien.
(a) What idea is expressed in the first four lines of the sonnet?
(b) Explain the significance of the phrase “deep-browed Homer”.
(c) What striking pictures are presented in the last six lines of the poem ?
(d) Quote the line which you think produces the greatest musical effect.
(e) Explain: “pure serene”; “eagle eyes”; “wild surmise”.

– John Keats

6. Strew on her roses, roses,
And never a spray of yew.!
In quiet she reposes;
Ah, would that I did too;
Her mirth the world required;
She bathed it in smiles of glee But her heart was tired, tired, And now they let her be.
Her life was turning, turning,
In mazes of heat and sound.
But for peace her soul was yearning, And now peace laps her round,
Her cabin’d, ample spirit,
It flutter’d and fail’d for breath.
To-night it doth inherit
The vasty hall of death.
(a) Does the poet show any grief at the person’s death? What exactly are his feelings on the occasion ?
(b) Quote examples of repetition from the poem.
(c) What do you gather about the life of the dead person from the poem ? (d) Explain :
(1) “Her cabin’d, simple spirit,
It flutter’d and fail’d for breath,”
(2) “To-night it doth inherit
The vasty hall of death.”

7. Books! ’tis a dull and endless strife:
Come, hear the woodland linnet,
How sweet his music ! on my life blog
There’s more of wisdom in it.
And hark! how blithe the throstle sings,
He too is no mean preacher:
Come forth into the light of things,
Let Nature be your teacher…
Enough of Science and of Art;
Come forth, and bring with you a heart
That watches and receives.

S.S.C. Examination

(a) Name and explain the figure of speech in the sixth line.
(b) What feelings does the poet seek to awaken in you by the following exclamations? “Books!””hark!”
(c) What kind of teaching does Nature give?
(d) Explain “the light of things”; “a heart that watches and receives”.

8. They tell us of an Indian tree.
Which, howsoe’er the sun and the sky May tempt its boughs to wander free And shoot and blossom wide and high Far better loves to bend its arms Downwards again to that dear earth, From which the life that fills and warms,
Its grateful being first had birth.
Tis thus, though wooed by flattering friends
And fed with fame (if fame it be).
This heart, my own dear mother, bends
With love’s true instinct back to thee.

(a) Name the figures of speech in the second and third lines.
(b) Why is the tree considered “grateful”?
(c) In what respect is the poet like the tree?
(d) Explain: “Wooed by flattering friends”; “Shoot and blossom wide and high.”

-S.S.C. Examination.

Anomalous Verbs : Definition & Types with Examples in Telugu

by

Anomalous Verbs

Introduction

The best way to learn a foreign language is to live in that country for sometime. In that case it can be learnt with more or less, as much ease as the mother-tongue; for one cannot help talking in that language to the people around for a major portion of the day. Conversation is made up of mainly ques- tions and answers. Hence it is: Interrogative, Negative and Affirmative sentences constitute the tissue of conversation.The Direct method of teaching as conceived and worked out in their Readers by Yates and Guttenberg, is based on this principle.

The chief types of sentences – Interrogative, Negaitive, Emphatic affirmative – are formed by only 24 finite verbs (or simply 24 finites) in English; hence the necessity of studying these 24 finites. While there are thousands of finites, 24 form a group by themselves and there is not a 25th of their kind, and that is the peculiarity of English. The syntax of these differs from that of the thousands of the verbs. This is, these 24 are not like the other verbs, hence they are called Anomalous finites. For one reason or other they cannot be given any one of the following names: weak, strong, regular, defective or auxiliary.

The following are the 24 finites: -am, is, was, are, were, have, has, had, do, does, did, can, could, may, might, shall, should, will, would, dare, must, need, ought, used.
These are derived from the following 12 anomalous. verbs- be, have, do, can, may, shall, will, dare, must, need, ought, used.
By this classification, it becomes surprisingly simpler to give useful syntactical information. How otherwise could the difference betwen (a) “have you”, and “do you have” (b) “need he” and “does he need” be shown clearly? This is clarified in the body of this article. The Grammar mechanism of Affirma- tive, Negative and Interrogative cannot be explained without reference to the 24 finites.

Anomalous Verbs Definition And Types with Examples In Telugu

These 24 finites occur (actually or potentially) in every sentence, but they are the despair of the student of English in earlier (and even in the later) stages. So, if the pupil in the early stages is enabled to use most of these in his conversation, he learns to speak and converse in English with others in the shortest time possible and with great ease in as much as these 24 finites not only provide the basis, but form the fabric of daily conversation. The table on page 127 shows the finites and non-finites of (a) Anomalous (b) Non-anomalous verbs, eat having been taken as a representative of the thousands of Non-anomalous verbs(i.e other verbs).

Functions of Anomalous finites

The 24 finites have mainly three functions. 1 Their first function, as structural words is to form Negative, Interrogative and Emphatic affirmative sentences. When they are used as structural words in ‘syntax’ (-sentence building) all the 24 finites are Anomalous.
They affect (1) the position of adverbs of frequency (2) help secure emphasis (a) on the negative idea in a sentence (b) on an Adjective or Adverb in a sentence.
Above all, they are needed to avoid unnecessary repetition of verbs, especially in conversation. A few of them get contracted when they are merged with (i) pronouns (ii) the introductory adverb “there” and (c) nouns.
1. (a) Th 24 finites alone can take not after them to form negative sentences.
1. Be is, am, are, was, were

Read and Learn more English Grammar Topics

AnomalousAnomalousOther verbs (Non-anomalous) — Thousands
Verbs (12)Finitcs (24)Finitcs (3)Non-finites (8)
1.    Be

2.    Can

3.    Do

4.    Have

5.    May

6.    Shall

7.    Will

8.    Dare

9.    Must

10.    Need

11. Ought

12.    Used

is, am, are,
was, were    5can, could    2Do, does, did    3Have, has, had,            3May, might       2

Shall, should    2

Will, would   2Dare    1

Must    1

Need    1

Ought    1

Used    1

1. Eat (1, we, you or they)

2. Eats (He, she orit)

3.  Ate (1, we, you, he, she, it or

they)

NoteSimple past tense forms
of all verbs except one, do not change
for NumbcrorPerson.

This is one of the reasons why the
English verb is easy.

Theexception isthe verb’tobe’, which
has two forms for the simple past:
Was (for Singular) and Were (for
Plural)

Was (He, she, it. orl)

Were (we, you, or they)

1. Present Participle (I am eating)

2. Past Participle (1 have eaten)

3.Perfect, Participle (I laving eaten six
plantains, 1 do not feel hungry).

4    Fused participle (1 object to Rama rat¬
ing platains).

5    Simple infinitive (I want to mi apples).

6.    Perfect infin. (You ought to have eaten
your food two hours ago).

7.    Gerund <1 am fond of eating apples).

8.    Verba! noun (The eating of fruit im¬
proves health)

 

AffirmativeNegativeMerged
He is tall.He is not tall.He isn’t tall
I do go.I do not go.I don’t go.
I will go.I will not go.I won’t go.
I shall go.I shall not go.I shalln’t go.
I can go.can not go.1 cann’t go.
She used to grumble.She used not to grumble.She usedn’t to grumble.
…………………..You need not goYou needn’t go.
H dares to goHe dare not goHe daren’t go.
She has gone.She has not gone.She hasn’t gone.
I may be going.I may not be going.I mayn’t be going

1-(b) The other verbs cannot take negative sentences:-
e.g. “I eat not apples”. – Wrong.
2-(a) finitesnegative sentencesలో వచ్చు not ఆ finites తో merge అగును. (అనగా పై 3 వ వరుసలో వలె) కలిసిపోవును.
(b) verb not merge
3 -(a) The 24 finites alone change places with the subject to form interrogative sentences:-

AffirmativeInterrogative
He is tall.Is he tall?
I do go.Do I go?
She used to grumbleUsed she to grumble?
He dares to enter the room.Dare he enter the room?

III- (b) The other verbs cannot chang places with the
subject to form interrogative sentences:
e.g.  “Eat I apples” ?- Wrong.
Note: If the main verb in a sentence is not one of the 24 tinites or does not contain one of them, the simple tense must be replaced by the corresponding compound (emphatic form of the verb containing do, does, or did, but these three are members of the 24 finites. So the procedure in I-(a) and II-(a) may therefore be adopted for transformation of sentences into Negative and Interrogative.
Emphatic

AffirmativeNeg. and Interr.
1. I eat it.I do eat it.Neg. I do not eat it Interr. – Do I eat it?.
2. He eats it.He does eat itNeg. – He does not eat it? Interr. Does he eat it?
3. I did it.I did do it.Neg. – I did not do it? Interr. – Did I do it?

Note: Do exercises 35 & 35 A
4. Adverbs of frequency (such as:- always, sometimes, often, frequently, ever, generally, rarely, usually, seldom, hardly, scarcely) are always put after the 24 finites but before all other verbs.
1. (a) I am always busy (b) He could never equal me.
2. (a) He always lies. (b) He never failed.
Note: Rule 4 is to be reversed when the A. F. is to be emphasied; as: He never could equal me.
5-(a) In the case of the 24 finites, we may emphasize the affirmative element in a sentence by using a strong stress on the finite (i.e. by means of intonation) as :- I can find time.
5-(b) But in the case of other verbs, we may emphasize the affirmative element in a sentence by using the forms do, does or did, as indicated under Emphatic Form of verbs; as :Emphatic – I do find time.
5-(c) Special emphasis is put on :-
(1) The negative idea in a sentence by placing the negative at the beginning of the sentence, the affirmative form of the verb being changed into the interrogative without the question mark at the end; as: 1. No sooner did he hear the news than he jumped for joy. 2. In no other way can I explain it.
(2) An adjective or an adverb by placing so at the beginning of the sentence followed by the said adjective or adverb, the affirmative form of the verb being changed into the interrogative without the question mark at the end; as:- (1) So fond was he of Tennis (or so much did he like (Tennis) that he used to play Tennis every day.
6. The 24 finites are also used in conversation to avoid unnecessary repetition.

(a) As a substitute verb:
1. Ought he pay fine? Yes he ought.
2. He eats more than you do.
3. You must go there. Must I?
(b) In short answers to questions (requiring Yes or No)
1. Did your brother pass the examination?
Yes, he did or No, he didn’t.
2. Can you lend me five fupees?
Yes, I can or No, I can’t.
(c) In short answers to subject questions:
1. Which of you will help me? Rama will.
2. How much of it was used? Half of it was.
3. Who discovered America? Columbus did.
(d) In question tags (which invariably contain one or other of 24 finites:
1. Rama went to Tuni, didn’t he?
2. You need not go, need you?
3. There has been heavy rain lately, hasn’t there?
4. Meet me to-morrow, will you?
5. Sita will meet me, won’t she?
(e) In declaring what is true of one person or thing is equally true of another person or thing:
1. I can go there.                                      I can go there and
2. You also can go there.                          so can you.
1. I saw the aeroplane.                              I saw the aeroplane,
2. My frien also saw the aeroplane          so did my friend.
N. B So is placed before the second part of the statement changed into the interrogative form (but without the question mark at the end).
(f) In declaring what is untrue of one person or thing is equally untrue of another person or thing:
1. I cannot go there.                                              I cannot go there nor
2. You cannot go there, either.                             (or neither) can you.
1. I didn’t see the aroplane.                                  I didn’t see the aeroplane nor (or neither)
2. My friend didn’t see the aeroplane, either.      did my friend.
Note: Nor (or either) is placed before the second part of the statement changed into the interrogative form (but with- out the question mark ? at the end).
(g) In recognising to be true what we hear :
“I saw you at the Post Office this morning,” A said to B. B replied, “Yes you did”. N.B- In the answer, yes is followed by. a pronoun and one of the 24 finites.
(h) In recognising to be untrue what we hear:
“I saw you at the Post Offic this morning” – No you didn’t. No is followed by a pronoun and an A. F.
((a) In correcting a suggestion (which is in the form of a question that is false), the A. F. is stressed onA
1. Why did you hit that child?
2. Why didn’t you come and see me yesterday?
But, I didn’t (you were misinformed). gibicos
But I did (and you were not at home).
N.B. The answer begins with but followed by a pronoun and then by a negative or affirmative A. F. according as the “why” question is a simple interrogative as in 1. or a negative interrogative as in 2.A few of the 24 A. F. are shortened with (a) Pronouns, (b) the Indroductory adverb ‘there’ and (c) Nouns; as-1: a) It’s (It is); Who’s (Who is); What’s (What is) He’s (He is) bleeding; He’s (He has) got a scar on his cheek; I’m (I am); I’d (I had) fever last night.
I’d (would) like to tell you a secret; Ill ( I will); I’ve (I have); You’are (You are); (b) There’s (There is); (c) The sun’s (sun is) about to come out soon.
Note: The acid test of one of the 24 finites being used as an Anomalous verb lies :-
(a) in its taking a not after it to form the negative (b) in changing places with the subject to form the interrogative; so it is Non-anomalous when conjugated with the auxiliary verb do to form the negative and the interrogative.
The second function of the finites is to form :-
(a) Compoound tenses: (a) continuous (b) perfect (c) emphatic affirmative with do, does and did forms)
(a) Passive voice :
The following fourteen (14) finites are used as (i) Anomalous and Non-anomalous (ii). some being used as auxiliary verbs only, while some others, as full verbs only, according to usage and meaning.
(A)-IS, AM, ARE, WERE, WAS,

1. Anamalous

(a) as auxiliary verbs to form :-
1. Continuous tenses with present participles; as :- He is reading a novel.
2. Perfect tense (archaic) with past participles of about twelve intransitive verbs to express a completed action result- ing in a change of (a) place or (b) condition or (c) both; as:
(a) They are gone to the market to buy food. He is come for the marriage. We are met (gathered or assembled)- to cele- brate the death anniversary of Potti Sreeramulu.
(b) The mighty are fallen on the bloody field. Jesus Christ is risen from the dead. How tall he is grown in a year! When the sun is set, it will be cooler. Are men descended from apes?
(c) The Chief Minister is returned sick from Delhi.
Note: The above sentences are not in the passive voice, though in each, the part of the verb be is folowed by a past participle; for the verbs are intransitive. So these verbs are in the perfect tense (archaic) and in the active voice.
3. Passive voice with past participles of transitive verbs as:- The tiger was killed.
(b) as full Verbs :-
1. Of incomplete predication:- He is brave.
2. Of complete predication with different meanings; as :- God is everywhere (exists). When will the wedding be (taken place)? You are to start now (must). I am to see him to- morrow (=it has been arranged that I shall). He has been to England three times (visited). What are you going to be when you grow up (become)?
2. NON-ANOMALOUS: to form (a) Negative Inter- rogative Why don’t you be more reasonable? (b) Imperative – Don’t be so curious.
(B) HAVE, HAS, HAD
(a) as auxiliary verb to form :-
Perfect tenses; as: (a) I have worked the whole day. (b) as full verbs meaning “possession” with different signification; as :-
1. Simple possession:- Birds have wings. I have a dislike for cigars.
2. Be the owner of material things:
(a) Has he a house of his own?
Colloq-He has got a house of his own.
(b) How much money have you?
Colloq- How much money have you got?
3. Physical and mental characteristic:
(a) Has she blue or brown eyes? Colloq-She has got blue yes.
(b) I haven’t a very good memory?
Colloq-I haven’t got very good memory.
4. Expressing relationship:- Have they any children? Colioq- How many children have they got?
5. With the meaning ‘Is (are) there’:- How many days has January? Have we any coffee in the house? Rumour has it that our school has won the foot-ball match.
6. With the meaning “if” :- Had we wings like birds, we should not need aeroplanes.

2. Non-Anomalous

(a) When did you have your shoes mended? (causative)
(b) (i) He had his leg broken. (suffering)
(b) I did not have much difficulty in
finding your house. (trouble)
(c) Did you have a (pleasant) (walk or journey); sound sleep; good time
(c) (i) How often do you have letter from your son?
(receive)
(b) Do you have a bath now? (take)
(Experi- ences)
(3) (joy) Various
(c) Does your teacher always have notes mean- for English lesson (use)
(d) At what time do you have dinner? (eat) (e) Do you have coffee or tea for you- breakfast? (drink)
(f) Will you have a cigarette ? (smoke) ings(6)

3. (a) Anomalous And (b) Non-Anomalous

(Combined) According to the nature of the activity (denoted by the verb) being 1. (a) particular occasion or (b) general. 2. (a) a necessity in the immediate future or (b)’a regular necessity starting in the past.
1. Anomalous – Have you a cold now? (particular occasion) Non-Anomalous:- Do you often have cold? (general)
2. Anomalous: Have you to attend office an hour earlier than usual this morning.
Non- Anomalous :- At what time do you have to attend office every morning?
Necessity applying to an activity in the immediate future. Necessity applying to a regular activity starting in the past.
Note: (a) With reference to the sentences: “I have to do this” and “I had to do this” (i.e. without Neg. Interr. or Em- phatic), we cannot say whether the verbs in those sentences are Anomalous or Non-anomalous.
Note:- (b) Must has only present tense, so the sense of the other tenses is expressed by the tenses of the verb have: as:-
Present
I must start at once.
I have to start at once.
I shall have to start soon.

Future
When the bell rings, I must go. Past
When the bell rang, I had to go.

(C) DO, DOES, DID
1. ANOMALOUS = as Auxiliary verbs only to form :-
(a) Neg: He did not work hard?
(b) Interr:- Does he work hard?
(c) Emphatic affirm:- He did not say much, but what he did say was important.
2. NON-ANOMALOUS:
(with the meaning “perform”) as – he did not do the whole work.
Note: In this case the verbs do, does, did are themselves conjugated in the Neg. & Interr. with the auxiliary do.
(D) USED (to) (Full verb)
Used, pronounced (“you;st”) derived from an obsolete verb and used only in the simple past (for expressing only things of the past time), is followed by to and an infinitive.
1. Anomalous; as :-
(a) He used n’t to smoke a cigar before marriage (habit)
(b) Used he to visit you regularly last year? (repeated action).
(c) The Hindu Kings used to be crowned in Delhi (custom). (iv) Life is not so cheap as it used to be ( state existing in the past). (v) It used to be thought (i.e. people thought) that the sun turned round the earth (motion). (vi) There used to be cinema in this street (there was).
2. Non-Anomalous in:-
(a) Colloquial style; as :-
(Did he use to visit you regularly last year?)
(b) Tag-questions; as :-
He used to smoke before marriage, didn’t he?
(or use (d) n’t he?)
(c) Responses; as :-
A:- Rama used to live in Hyderaba.
B: Oh, did he ? (or, Oh, used he ?)
N.B: In the following used (pronounced: you : st) is a past participle meaning “accustomed to” or familiar “with” as:- (i) Soldiers are used to danger. (ii) I am not used to (hard labour) carrying logs of wood. (iii) You will soon get used to our ways.
Note: There is altogether another verb use (=make use of) whose past tense is used (pronounced Yu: zd).
This is a regular verb; as :-
What kind of wood did he use for windows? (E) DARE (Full verb)
1. ANOMALOUS AND NON-ANOMALOUS
With the same meaning “have the courage or impudence enough to do something”;
Anomalous
1. Neg. He dare not jump across the stream.
Non-anomalous
1. Neg. He does not dare to
jump across the stream.

Anomalous Verbs

2. Interr-Dare he jump across the stream?
3. Conditional sentence  do not know if he dares jump across the stream.
Note Dare is used only in the simple present with a bare infinitive without s in the 3rd Pers. Singular Present tense.
2. Interr.- Does he dare to Jump across the stream?
3. Semi Neg.- He hardly dares to speak in my presence.
4. Indirect question – I wonder how he dared to insult me.
5. Affirmative-He dares to insult me.
Note Here dare is used as a
regular verb with a to infinitive ands in the 3rd Person in Singular Present tense.
2. NON-ANOMALOUS: Regular verb (meaning challenge or face); as :-
He dares Rama to jump across the stream (challenge). He dared many dangers (faced).
(F) NEED (Full verb)

1. ANOMALOUS (with the meaning “to be under the necessity to do something”).
It is used only in the Simple present with a bare infinitive without ‘s’ in 3rd person Singular in:-
(i) Neg: He need not go so early.
(ii) Semi Neg:- The teacher need hardly tell the back- ward pupils that they must work hard.
(iii) Interr:- Need he go so early?
(iv) Indirect question:- Ido not understand why he need go so early.

2. NON-ANOMALOUS Regular verb with the mean- ing “require” as :-
Does he need warm clothing?
Note: In the case of the above 14 verbs, when they are used as, Non-anomalous, they follow the rules governing other verbs for forming Negative and Interrogative.
3. The third function is (a) to serve as Model verbs (i.c. to form) certain moods for which English has no inflected verb (forms) (b) to express such concepts as are not covered by the moods in English.

The above function is served by the following 10 verbs which are always anomalous :
G-Can, could; may, might; must, ought; shall, should; will, would; (auxiliary verbs) These are originally verbs with full meanings. But when these senses have been entirely lost they are said to be used as Auxiliary verbs).
(a) Model verbs; as:-
1. Optative mood: May you live long! (wish)
2. Potential mood:- I can answer the question (ability) 3. (Fast dying) Subjunctive mood:
a) We eat that we may live (purpose).
b) If he should discover it, we are ruined (condition).
c) Would that I had died for thee (unfulfilled wish)
d) I would not do it, if I were you.
e) He may catch the train, if he hurries (doubt).
(b)ai) You must (ought to) do it (compulsion; necessity; obligation).
b) Who may this person be? (uncertainty).
c) It may rain to-morrow (possibility or contingency).
d) May I use your dictionary ? (permission).
e) You might post this letter for me (request).
f) The thieves hid behind the bush (for fear) that the police might not see them (fear).

USED (to): DARE, NEED (Auxiliary verbs,
The three A.F’s Used (to), Dare and Need have been already treated as full verbs [Vide II function (D) (E) (F)] These A.F’s are also used as Auxiliary verbs, when they accompany- ing a non-finite verb-form enlarge the main verbal meaning (expressed by the non-finite) vide: Webster’s International Dictionary as:
1. He used to smoke cigars before his marriage.
He used to (auxiliary) express that smoking (main verb) is a past habit.
2. He dare not jump across the stream.
He dare (auxiliary) expresses that there is no courage for him to jump (main verb).
3. You need not start now.
Here need (auxiliary) expresses that there is no present necessity
of starting (main verb).
From the foregoing, it is clear that :-
a) 24 A.F’s are (i) Auxiliary and
b) 10 A.F’s (lil Function G)
are only
c) The remaining 14 A.F.’s
Anomalous.
(a) Auxiliary
(b) Anomalous Auxiliary andFull verbs.
Anomalous ana gill Non-anomalous

Correct the following

1. Loved he not?
2. He this book saw not.
3. He reads not his book with care.
4. He did not brought the books.
5. Intend you to go?
6. I not like that man.
7. What said you?
8. Be not late for school.
9. Which boy did speak?
10. Go not out in the rain.
11. Why wentest thou to his house?
12. Why sit you not down.
13. Which way went the man?
14. My son obeys me not.
15. Went he to school?
16. I have no any money.
17. Why you come?
18. To whom you will give this book?
19. Why you have come?
20. Why you were here?
21. Came he?

Ans:- 1. Didn’t he love? 4. He did not bring the books. 5. Do you intend to go? 8. Don’t be late for school. 9. Which boy spoke? 11. Why didst thou go to his house? 13. Which way did the man go? 14. My son does not obey me. 16. I have no money. 21. Did he come? or Was he come?

Participles or Verbal Adjectives

Participles ar 355:- 1. Present participle 2. Past participle 3. Perfect participle. ఇవి క్రియలవలన ఏర్పడును.
(a) Present Participle:- a Simple present tense o చివర ing చేర్చుటచేత నేర్పడును. ఉదా : 80, going
(b) Past Participle:- a ox, Simple present tense రూపములకు చివర (i)en, n చేర్చుటచేతను ఏర్పడును; ఉదా :- beat, beaten, show, shown; (ii) ed, d,t walk, walked; love, loved; burn, burnt verb యొక్క Conjugation లోని మూడవ రూపము (అనగా ఆఖరు వరుసలోని రూపము) Past participle.
(c) Perfect Participle:- 5 having so past participle రూపములు చేర్చుటనే ఏర్పడును. ఉదా :- having walked, having loved, having burnt.
Ten Forms of Different Participles Transitive Verbs
Active voice
Passive voice
Present: Eating
Being eaten
Past:-
Eaten
Perfect: Having eaten
Having been eaten
Intransitive Verbs
Present Fading The flowers in the vase are fading. Past – faded: The flowers have not entirely faded. perfect- Having faded: The flowers having faded, had to be thrown out.
N.B. 1. A good knowledge of the participles as well as their use in 1. Construction 2. Synthesis and 3. Transformation of sentences goes a long way in acquiring command over the language.

The participle construction is a brief and convenient way of joining a subsidiary statement to the principal one. Present Participle
This is one of the eight non-finites, formed by adding “ing” to the simple present tense form; so we cannot make sentencs with this alone.
The following are some of its most important uses:
1. As part of a verb to form the continuous tenses; I am eating; I was eating; I shall be eating; etc.
2. As epithets :- There are books in running brooks.
3. As a predicate-adjective:-
He came running along the street.
N.B. The following examples are worth noticing :- 1. There is no one living in the street. 2. They wait about doing nothing. 3. He felt his strength improving. 4. He spent an hour visiting all the stalls in the Exhibition. 5. If one’s life is spent trying to stop nuclear tests, it is the noblest. 6. He is busy preparing for the examination. 7. While going to the bazar, he had an accident.
4. In compound participle phrases:-
5. A good-looking fellow. 2. A well-fitting cap.
Note:- Running brooks running are run అను క్రియనుండి ఏర్పడి adjective వలె brook అను noun ను quality చేయుచున్నది. ఇట్లు verb వలెను. adjective వలెను కూడ వ్యవహరించుట డి దీనిని Verbal Adjective అందురు.
Since running partakes of the nature of both a verb and an adjective it is called a participle.
5. Participles, adjectives ao adjectives
a) Adverbs చేత modify చేయబడును. ఉదా:-
The girl was found in an almost dying stage.
b) Degrees of Comparison ను తీసికొనుము. ఉదా :- He spoke in a more pleasing way.

6. Some participles are used as Prepositions.
There are many rumours concering, (or regarding) the murder; Respecting your plan, I shall write to you.. During the summer vacation, my father wishes to celebrate my sister’s marriage.
7. Some participles are used as actual nouns: as >> buildings; surroundings; savings; cuttings; belongings’ etc.
Present Participle
Active voice
a) Qualifying the subject:-
1. I was walking on the road. I saw a snake.
ఇందు మొదటి వాక్యము Subsidiary of statement (అప్రధాన విషయము), రెండవది Primary statement (ప్రధానవిషయము). ఇచట subsidary statement ను Participle phrase లోనికి మార్చి, పై రెండు వాక్యములను కలిపి, Simple sentence గా ఇట్లు వ్రాయవచ్చును. Walking on the road, I saw a snake.
Walking – Present participle qualifying the pronoun. 1. (Or) Walking on the road, participle phrase qualifying. ‘I walking on the road, saw a snake’ అనుట తప్పు. ఏలన pronoun (1) subject ou participle phrase subject 50% ముందు రావలెను.
5 noun subject as a participle phrase subject ముందు గాని తరువాత గాని రావచ్చును. ఉదా : walking on the road, Rama saw a snake.Or Rama walking on the road, saw a snake.
Note : 1. పై వాక్యములోని రెండు పనులలో ఒకటి ప్రారంభమై జరుగుచుండగా రెండవది సంభవించును.
Note: 2. Simple Walking on the road, I saw a snake. Complex – While I was walking on the road, I saw a
Compound – I was walking on the road and I happened to see a snake then.
2. Taking up his gun, he rushed at the tiger. పై వాక్యములోని రెండు పనులు ఇంచుమించు ఒకే సమయమందు (అనగా ఒక పని వెనువెంటనే రెండవది) ప్రారంభమగును.
e.g. (1) The sum rising has made the sky bright.
The day dawning, we all woke up. (Participle in an absolute phrase).
3. Not seeing the mother bear, the hunter went upto its den to catch hold of one of its cubs.
పై వాక్యములోని రెండు పనులు ఒకే సమయమునందు ప్రారంభమై, ఒకటి జరుగుచున్నంత కాలము రెండవది జరుగును.
4. Next morning filling up their stock with provisions the travellers rode off through the forest.
పై వాక్యములోని రెండు పనులలో ఒకటి జరిగిన వెంటనే రెండవది జరుగును. అనగా రెండు పనులకు మధ్య అవధి (interval) తక్కువ.
5. (a) He is feverish. He has applied for leave. 33 వాక్యము (subsidiary statement) లోని verb చే సూచించబడు స్థితి (state) వలన రెండవ వాక్యములోని పని జరుగుట సంభవించును.
2 do Jivo 503, Simple, Complex, Compound sentences గా ఇట్లు వ్రాయవచ్చును.
S-Being feverish, he has applied for leave. Cx-He has applied for leave, as he is feverish
Cd-He is feverish, so he has applied for leave. (b) 1. The weather was fine. 2. I went out for a walk. S-The weather being fine, I went out for a walk. Ax – As the weather was fine, I went out for a walk. Cd-The weather was fine and I therefore went out for a
(c) He had a sword in hand. He rushed at the enemy. S-S Sword being in hand, he rushed at the enemy
Or Sword in hand, he rushed at the enemy (Here the parti- ciple is understood).

6. (1) He opened the box. (2) Upon that he saw a snake
మొదటి వాక్యములోని పని జరిగిన మీదట దాని ఫలితముగా అంతట రెండవ ‘వాక్యములో” పని జరుగును.
Simple – Opening the box, he found a snake in it.
Cx- When he opened the box, he found a snake in it. Cd-He opened the box and thereupon he found a snake
7. Turn to the right. You will find a temple. S-Turning to the right, you will find a temple. Cx-If you turn to the right, you will find a temple. Cd. Turn to the right and you will find a temple. e. g……God willing, we shall meet again (=If God wills…) 8. You must confess your fault. Otherwise you will be fined.
S-Not confessing your fault, you will be fined.
Cx-If you do not confess your fault, you will be fined (or) Unless you confess your fault, you will be fined.
Cd-You must confess your fault, or you will be fined. 9. The wrestler, possessed greater strength than his opponent. The former was defeated.
S. Possessing greater strength the wrestler was defeated. Or
In spite of the wrestlr possessing greater strength than his opponent he was defeated.
Cx-Though the wrestler possessed greater strength than his opponent; he was defeated.
10. When the present participle is left without a proper subject of reference, the participle is called an impersonal absolute as:
(1) Considering hisabilities, he should have been selected (=If one considers his abilities). (2) Roughly speaking; there are a thousand applications for two posts.
3. Supposing this to be true, you are certainly guilty.
b) Qualifying the object:
1) I saw a boy. 2) He was sitting near the well.
S-I saw a boy sitting near the well.
Cx. I saw a boy who was sitting near the well. Cd-A boy was sitting near the wel and I happened to see
him then.
Our Headmaster starts today to attend the District Head- master’s conference opening tomorrow at Kakinada.
c) Qualifying the complement
The bearer of this note is a candidate appearing for the Matric in April next.
Present Participle
Passive Voice
a) Qualifying the subject:

1. He was disgusted with his step-mother’s treatment. 2. He left the house.
ఇచ్చట Passive Voiceలో నున్న subsidiary statement లోని క్రియను passive present participleలోనికి మార్చి, పై రెండు వాక్యము లను కలిపి Simple sentence గా ఇట్లు వ్రాయవచ్చును.
.Being disgusted with his step-mother’s treatment, he left thehouse.
Being disgusted passive present participle qualifying the pronoun.
Note: Being disgusted అను మాటను లోపింపజేసి వాక్యము నిట్లు కూడ వ్రాయవచ్చును.

Disgusted with his step-mother’s treatment he left the house.
e.g. Provided you agree to the condition, there will be no difficiculty = That you agree to the condition, being provided, there will be no difficulty.
b) Qualifying the object:
1. The people saw the traitor’s corpse.
2. It was dragged along the streets.
S-The people saw the traitor’s cropse being dragged along the streets.
Or
The people saw the traitor’s corpse dragged along the streets (omitting being).
Cx-The people saw the traitor’s corpse, while it was being dragged along the streets.
Perfect Participle
Active Voice
a) Qualifying the subject;
He made a mistake..
He apologised.
-ఈ రెండు పనులలో (ఒకటి తప్పు చేయుట) పూర్తి అయిన పిమ్మట రెండవ పని క్షమింపగోరులు) జరుగును. అందుచే మొదటి పూర్తి అయిన పనిని తెలియజేయు వాక్యమును Perfect Participle లోనికి మార్చి ఆ రెండు వాక్యములను కలిపి Simple sentenceగా ఇట్లు వ్రాయవచ్చును.
Having made a mistake, he apologised.
Having made-Perfect Participle qualifying the subject,
e.g: Having eaten six plantains, I suffered from stom- achache last night.
b) Used in an absolute phrase:
The commander had fled. So the army was defeated.
The commander having fled the army was defeated.

Note: Perfect participle చేయుపనిని చేయునని గ్రహింపనగును.
c) He has narrowly failed. He wishes to sit for the October examination.
Past Perfect tense
Having failed narrowly he wishes to appear for the October examination.
e.g. Having learnt that there is a vacancy for a typist, I apply for
Note: Perfect participle 6 Present Perfect
tense చేయు పనిని చేయును.
Perfect Participle
Passive Voice
He was insulted by his master. So he resigned.
Passive voice లో నున్న మొదట జరిగిన పనిని తెలియజేయు వాక్యమును Passive Perfect Participle లోనికి మార్చిపై రెండు వాక్యములను కలిపి Simple sentenceగా ఇట్లు వ్రాయవచ్చును.
Having been insulted by his master, he resigned.
The Commander had The Commander having been been killed. So the army fled. killed, the. army fled.

Note : ఒక పని పూర్తి అయిన పిమ్మట దాని ఫలితముగా కొంత ఆవధితో మరియొక పనీ సంభవించు సందర్భములోనే Perfect participleను
వాడవలెను.
Note: Sometimes the perfect participle is understood: as: 1. Given the three sides of a triangle, construct it = The three sides of a triangle (having been) given, (you) construct it. 2. All things (having been) considered, you were found to be in the right.
Past Participle A
The past participle is one of the eight non-finites (the third form in the conjugation) and so we cannot make a sentence with this alone.
The following are some of the important uses:
1. It forms part of a verb to form the perfect tenses as: I have eaten. I had eaten.
2. As epithet:
1. A ruined tower. 2. A burnt child dreads the fire.

Note : Ruined అనునది ruin అను verb నుండి ఏర్పడి పనిని తెలియజేయును. tower అను nounను adjective వలె qualify చేయు చున్నది. కాబట్టి దానిని past participle అందురు.
3. As a predicative adjective – He looks tired.
4. Compound Participle Phrase:
1. Well-behaved boy. 2. Ready-made goods.
5. To form the passive voice:
A tiger was killed by me.
6. As a noun: Let bygones be bygones.
7. To express the idea of getting a thing done by others: I cannot do it; so I shall have (or get) it done by my brother.

Note: Done – Obj. compl. of have (or get).
B . I saw a box. It was covered with a cloth.
Subsidiary statement eos ‘It was covered with a cloth’ passive voice లో నున్నది. దీనిని passive voice లో నుండు Adjective clause లోనికి మార్చి ఆ రెండు వాక్యములను కలిపి complex sentence గా ఇట్లు వ్రాయవచ్చును.
Complex: I saw a box which was covered with a cloth.
complex sentenceలో నున్న Rel. pron. (which) ను దాని తరువాతనున్న be యొక్క రూపము (was)ను కూడ లోపింపజేసి ఆ Adjective clause ను phrase లోనికి మార్చి ఆ వాక్యములను simple sentenceగా ఇట్లు వ్రాయవచ్చును.

Simple: I saw a box covered with a cloth.
Note: covered; Past part. qualifying the noun box. e.g: 1. The basket is filled with flowers. 2. It is on the table.
Complex: The basket which is filled with flowers, is on the
Sim: The basket filled with flowers is on the table. Note: filled – Past Participle qualifying the noun basket. Note: Transitive ver a past participle మాత్రమే ఈ construction సాధ్యమగును.
1. With the enemy’s guns resounding, and his own friends opposed to him, Lenin had to agree to a compromise. 2. Bruised and bleeding, Gandhi was taken to his friend’s house in Durban.
1. This had been done.
2. We all left the place.
Note: Done absolute this.
D This (having been) done, we all left the place (=When this had been done, we……….) Past part. qualifying the Nominative
Gerunds or Verbal Nouns

(1) ‘Reading novels is pleasant’ e అనునది Verb వలె novels అను కర్మను కలిగియుండుటయే గాక, noun వలె is అను క్రియకు కర్తగా నున్నది. కాబట్టి reading అనునది verb వలెను. noun వలెను కూడ వ్యవహరించుటచే అది యొక verb-noun; దీనినే Gerund అందురు.
Gerund present participle 38 a simple present రూపమునకు చేర్చుటచే ఏర్పడును.
(2) Transitive verb 35 Gerunds Active voice! సంబంధించినవి రెండు Passive voice కి సంబంధించినవి రెండు మెత్తము నాలుగు రూపములు గలవు..
verbయొక్క Gerund కు రెండే రూపములు,
Present: Fading. Perfect – Having faded.

(3) ఇప్పుడు Participle రూపములును. Gerund రూపములును, ఒక్కగానే కనిపించుచున్నవి. కాని Participle, Gerund ఒకటి కావు. Participle adjective పనిచేయగా Gerund noun పనిని చేయును.

(4) Gerund ఒక విధమైన Nounకాబట్టి ఆది Noun వలనే ఒక verbకు (c) complement m (d) 25
(a) subject (b) object preposition కు object గాను ఉండవచ్చును. ఉదా ::
a) Subject to a verb: Reading is pleasant.
b) Object to a verb: I like reading;
c) Complement to a verb: The best kind of occupation is reading.
d) Object to a prepostion: He is fond of reading.

(5) Gerund, transitive verb od 50 verbకూడ కాబట్టి Tranisitive verbవలనే objectను govern చేయును. ఉదా I am fond of reading novels.

(6) Gerund verb sa adverbs 33 modify 3.
ఉదా :
a) He is noted for speaking clearly.
b) He is in the habit of taking exercise daily.
Note: oder main verbos subject, Gerund
యొక్క subject ఒకటే అయి ఉండవలెను. ఉదా :
We increase trade by learning languages.
Wrong – Trade increases by learning languages.
ఏలన learning కి subject గా trade ఉండ వీలు లేదు.
Correct: Trade increases by our learning languages.sg మారునపుడు Gerund (learning)కి వెనుక దానికి చెందు subject యొక్క possessive case రూపము (our) వాడవలెను.
Note: If the main verb is passive the subject of the Gerund may be implied; as:

1. Trade is increased by learning languages. 2. Iron is found by digging in the earth.
A Gerund should not be used for infinitive and vice versa, where idiom has established certain conventions.
A writer ignorant of that idiom is often betrayed by his failure to observe the conventions.
Some nouns, adjectives and verbs are idiomatically fol- lowed by the infinitve and some by the gerund, a few of which are set out in the table see page 153.

The sentence; “Your mother is opposed to your going abroad.” Implies: your mother is not opposed to you person- ally, but she is opposed to the action of going abroad.
Going: Gerund, object of the prepostion, to and qualified by the possessive adjective your.
On the above analogy we have, “I am opposed to Rama’s going abroad.” This sentence is grammatically correct but reads awkward if not absurd. The use of the noun Rama in the possessive case, (Rama’s) offends against euphony, elegance and genius of the language. This is confirmed firstly by the pronoun this having no possessive form at all; as:
“There is little hope of this happening today”. Secondly, this usage has long been adopted by good writers:
“Upon Prometheus telling his father, the wish of his friend, Valentine, he at once determined to send his son to Milan”- Lamb..
Lastly this provides an idiomatic and elegant mode of expression: “I am opposed to Rama going abroad”.

But here the noun Rama defines construction. The par- ticiple going and the noun Rama are fused into a whole; hence going is called a fused participle.
Note: The possessive form must be avoided in the case of nouns (in fused participle construction) and usage has changed since the days of Fowler.
Note: A running stream means a stream that runs (here running is a participle qualifying the noun stream).
Whereas ‘drinking water’ does not mean ‘water’ that drinks but ‘water fit for dinking (here evidently drinking is not a participle but a gerund used as an adjective qualifying the noun water as: Riding horse (=Horse used for riding, walking stick (=stick used in walking); Writing table (=table used for writing); Dining hall (=hall used for dining), Reading room (-room used for reading.)

To Distinguish Gerunds from Participles
Participles
1. A running stream
2. A dancing bear
3. A walking dictionary
Gerunds
A running track A dancing lesson
A dancing hall
A walking stick

1. Transformation of sentences with the help of the Gerund: A-Complex: When we opened the box, we found a snake in it, Simle On opening the box, we found a snake in it. Cd-1 opened the box and found a snake in it.
B-Complex: I do not doubt that you are able to do it. Simple -I do not doubt your being able to do it.
Cd-You can do it and I don’t doubt it.
C-Complex: The boy was punished, because he did not sit for the examination. Cd-The boy had not sat for the examina- tion, so he was punished.
D-Complex: Does anybody object, if I smoke?
Simple Does anybody object to my smoking?
E-Complex: Since I joined the army I have not seen him. Simple: Since joining the army I have not seen him. Cd-I joined the army, but I have not seen him since.
2. Complex Since he joined the army, I have not seen him. Simple: Since his joining the army, I have not seen him. Cd-He joined the army, but I have not seen him since. Ex. 35 B.
ఈ క్రింది వానిలో participles ను Gerunds ను కనుగొనుము.

1. Here is a sleeping cat.
2. I am tired of doing this work.
3. Sleeping is necessary to life.
4. Sleeping is more difficult than writing.
5. In running the race he fell.
6. I saw a boy throwing a stone.
7. Riding is a healthy exercise.
8. He earns his living by writing books.
9. Writing books is his employment.
10. His employment is writing books.
11. We found him writing a book.
12. I saw a big writing table.
13. A rolling stone gathers no moss.
14. A barking dog never bites.
15. A drowning man catches at a straw.
16. A kid standing on the roof of a house saw a wolf passing by.

Verbal Nouns
Gerund నకు వెనుక The యును తరువాత of ను ఉండిన దానిని ప్రత్యేకముగా Verbal Noun అందురు. The reading of novels is pleasant. Formation of verbs
Verbs are formed from:
i) Nouns: Grass, graze; Food, feed; Fool, befool; Slave, enslave; Haste, hasten; Cross, crucify.
ii) Adjectives: Soft, soften; Glad, gladden; Just, justify.

Ex. 35 C
Form Verbs from:
Blood, gulf, hard, friend, dark, length, courage, bath, glass, fruit, broad, wide, loss. Convention Regarding Use of Gerund and Infinitive After Certain Words
Sl. No. Followed by Preposition & Gerund
1. Habit of rising early.
2. Duty of checking the work.
3. Idea of waiting till to-morrow.
4. Objections to white-washing
5. Resistance to being driven out.
6. With the view of building a house.
1. (Un) equal to facing danger.
2. Be used to carrying logs of wood.
3. Weary of walking.
4. Skilful in doing.
5. Sick of waiting.
1. Confess to having stolen.
2. Object to paying his share.
3. Succeed in solving the problem.
4. Looks forward to meeting his son.
5. Aim at passing the examination.
6. Perists in doing a thing.
NOUNS
Followed by Infinitive
1. Refusal to help me.
2. Reluctance to use force.
3. Tendency to tease subordinates.
4. Determination to learn English.
5. Hesitation to buy shares.
6. Inspiration to immortalise daffodils.
ADJECTIVES
1. (Un) able to face danger.
2. (In) sufficient to put down the rebellion. 3. (In) adequate to support a family.
4. (In) competent to manage the office. 5. Delightful to wander in the moonlight. VERBS
1. Does not profess to be a scholar.
2. Refusal to pay the fine.
3. Threatens to punish.
4. Avails to soften him..
5. Pledges [1. to engage] one’s word or one’s honour to do a thing. [=2. to bind oneself to do a thing]. [=to bind one by (or as if by) a pledge to do a thing e.g. He pledged the signatory powers to meet the common danger]. 6. (Be) pledged [-to cause one to make (or sign) a pledge: e.g. The officers are pledged to join the clerical staff in the strikel.

Tenses Introduction : Definition & Types with Examples in Telugu

by

Tenses Introduction

210. ఈ క్రింది వాక్యములను చదవండి:
1. I write this letter to please you.
2. I wrote the letter in his very presence.
3. I shall write another letter tomorrow.
మొదటి వాక్యములోని Verb “write” –  present time. (cht)
రెండవ వాక్యములోని  Verb “wrote” – past time,
మూడవ వాక్యములోని  Verb “shall write” – future time.

Read and Learn more English Grammar Topics

211. ఈ విధముగా Verb తన యొక్క present, past tense మరియు future tense లను తెలియజేస్తుంది. 211. వర్తమానకాలమును అనగా ఇప్పటి కాలమును తెలియజేయు Verb ను Present Tense లో ఉన్నది అంటాము.
I write.                        I love.

భూతకాలమును అనగా గడచిపోయిన కాలమును తెలియజేయు Verb ను Past Tense లో ఉన్నది. అని అంటాము.
I wrote.                        I loved.

భవిష్యత్ కాలములోని రాబోవు పరిస్థితిని తెలుపు Verb ను అది Future Tense లో నున్నది అని
అంటాము.
I shall write.                  I shall love.

212. ఈ విధముగా మూడు ప్రధానమైన Tenses (కాలమానములు) ఉన్నవి. అవి : భూత, భవిష్యత్, Sgar renew. m The Present, the Past, the Future.
గమనిక (Note) : కొన్ని సార్లు సందర్భమును బట్టి past tense వర్తమానకాలం అర్థాన్ని (sense of present tense) Present tense, future tense 55.
I wish I knew the answer. (= I’m sorry I don’t know the answer).
(Past tense – Present time)
Let’s wait till he comes, (Present tense- future tense)

Tenses Introduction Definition And Types With Examples In Telugu

213. ఈ క్రింద “love” అను పదమునకు సంభవించే ముఖ్యమైన Tenses చూపబడినవి :

PRESENT TENSE
Singular NumberPlural Number
1st PersonI loveWe love
2nd personYou loveYou love
3rd PersonHe lovesThey love
PAST TENSE
Singular NumberPlural Number
1st PersonI lovedWe loved
2nd PersonYou lovedYou loved
3rd PersonHe lovedThey loved
FUTURE TENSE
Singular NumberPlural Number
1st PersonI shall/will love.We shall/will love
2nd PersonYou will loveYou will love
3rd PersonHe will loveThey will love

 

214. ఈ క్రింది వాక్యములను చదవండి.
1. I love.                                                  (Simple Present)
2. I am loving.                                         (Present Continuous)
3. I have loved.                                        (Present Perfect)
4. I have been loving.                              (Present Perfect Continuous)
ఈ పై వాక్యములలో Verbs (క్రియలు) అన్నీ కూడా present tense (వర్తమాన కాలములో నున్నవి. మొదటి వాక్యములోని Verb యొక్క action మామూలు ధోరణిలో సామాన్యముగా చెప్పబడినది. ఆ పని పూర్తి అయ్యిందా లేక అసంపూర్తిగా మిగిలి పొయ్యిందా అనే విషయం జోలికి పోలేదు.
రెండవ వాక్యములో, action ఇంకా నడుస్తూనే ఉంది. కాని ఆగిపోలేదు. పూర్తికాలేదు అని అర్ధం. మూడవ వాక్యములో action మాట్లాడు సమయానికి సంపూర్ణముగా అంకితం అయ్యింది అని చెప్పబడినది.
నాలుగవ వాక్యములో action ఇంకా పూర్తిగా నడుస్తూ ఉంది. పూర్తి కాలేదు అనే అర్ధం వస్తుంది. దీనిని present perfect continuous tense అని అంటాము. ఇచ్చట action సమగ్రంగా సడుస్తూంది అనే భావానికి బలం వస్తుంది. ఈ విధముగా tense ఎప్పుడు action సంభవించింది అనే విషయమే కాకుండా, ఆ పని ఏ విధంగా జరుగుతుంది అనే అర్థాన్ని కూడా యిస్తుంది.

215. Present Tense verb కు నాలుగు రూపములు ఉన్నట్లుగా Past Tense కు కూడా నాలుగు రూపాలు (భాగములు) ఈ క్రింద చూపబడిన విధముగా ఉన్నవి :
1. I loved.                                                (Simple Past)
2. I was loving.                                        (Past Continuous)
3. I had loved.                                          (Past Perfect)
4. I had been loving.                                (Past Perfect Continuous)
అదే విధముగా Future Tense కు కూడా నాలుగు భాగములు ఉన్నవి :
1. Ishall/will love.                                        (Simple Future)
2. I shall/will be loving                                (Future Continuous)
3. I shall / will have loved.                          (Future Perfect)
4. I shall have been loving.                        (Future Perfect Continuous)
ఈ విధముగా Verb లోని భాగమైన Tense అనునది time, action యొక్క పరిస్థితిని (ఎంత వరకు పూర్తి అయ్యింది అనే భావము) సూచించునని తెలుస్తుంది.

216. Verb ఎప్పుడు కూడా, Subject (కర్త) యొక్క number (singular, plural) ను మరియు subject యొక్క person (నేను, నీవు, అతడు) అను భావములను అనుసరించి యుండును.

Simple Present TensePresent Continuous Tense
I speakI am speaking
You speakYou are speaking
He speaksHe is speaking
We speakWe are speaking
They speakThey are speaking
Present Perfect TensePresent Perfect Continuous Tense
I have spokenI have been speaking
You have spokenYou have been speaking
He has spokenHe has been speaking
We have spokenWe have been speaking
They have spokenThey have been speaking
Simple Past TensePast Perfect Tense
I spokeI had spoken
You spokeYou had spoken
He spokeHe had spoken
We spokeWe had spoken
They spokeThey had spoken
Past Continuous TensePast Perfect Continuous Tense
I was speakingI had been speaking
You were speakingYou had been speaking
He was speakingHe had been speaking
We were speakingWe had been speaking
They were speakingThey had been speaking
Simple Future TenseFuture Perfect Tense
I shall/will speakI shall/will be speaking
You will speakYou will be speaking
He will speakHe will be speaking
We shall/will speakWe shall/will be speaking
They will speakThey will be speaking
Future Continuous TenseFuture Perfect Continuous Tense
I shall/will have spokenI shall/will have been speaking
You will have spokenYou will have been speaking
He will have spokenHe will have been speaking
We shall/will have spokenThey will have spoken
He shall/will have been speakingThey will have been speaking

 

అభ్యాసము 45
(a) ఈ క్రింద ఇవ్వబడిన వాక్యములలోని Verbs ను గుర్తించి దాని Moods, Tenses ను తెలుపుము.
1. The river flows under the bridge.
2. I shall answer the letter to-night.
3. I knew he was there, for I had seen him come.
4. It has been raining all night.
5. I hear he has passed all right.
6. I had finished when he came.
7. He takes but little pride in his work.
8. I have been living here for months.
9. Be good, sweet maid.
10. By this time to-morrow I shall have reached my home.
11. It is time we left.
12. He told me that he had finished the work.
13. God forgive you !
14. He is waiting for you in the compound.
15. Piper, pipe that song again.
16. I am hoping to gel a holiday soon.
17. Perhaps it were better to obey him.
18. Do noble deeds, not dream them all the day.
19. I shall have plenty of time tomorrow.
20. Though this be madness, yet there is method in it.
21. The king had never before led his troops in battle.
22. If he was guilty, his punishment was too light.
23. We have heard a strange story.
24. The travellers, all of whom had seen the chameleon, could not agree about its colour.
25. Beware lest something worse should happen, to you.
26. The farmer is cutting the corn which hasripened.
27. I wish my brother were here.
28. She would rather we stayed till tomorrow.

అధ్యాయము 25

The Uses Of The Present And Past Tenses Present Tenses

Simple Present Tense
217. Simple Present ను ఈ విధంగా ఉపయోగిస్తారు :-
(1) ఒక అలవాటును (habit) చిత్రీకరించుటకు :
He drinks tea every morning.
I get up everyday at five o’clock.
My watch keeps good time.

(2) ఒక సత్యాన్ని తెలియజేయుటకు
The sun rises in the east.
Honey is sweet.
Fortune favours the brave.

(3) Here, there అను పదములతో ప్రారంభింపబడి, ఏమి జరుగుచున్నది అనే భావాన్ని తెలియజేయుటకు
Here comes the bus!
There she goes!
(4) ప్రత్యక్ష కథలో Simple Past Verb కు అనుబంధముగా –
Sohrab now rushes forward and deals a heavy blow to Rustam.
Immediately the Sultan hurries to his capital.

(5) ఒక ఖచ్చితమైన programme కు లేక ఒక fixed timetable కు భాగంగా నున్న భవిష్యత్ సంఘటనను తెలియచేయుటకు
The next flight is at 7.00 tomorrow morning.
The match starts at 9 o’clock.
The train leaves at 5.20.
When does the coffee house reopen?
వాడుక భాషలొ ఈ భావాలు బాగా కనిపిస్తాయి.

218. Simple Present Tense verb ను వేరే విధములుగా వాడే విధానములను గూడా ఇచ్చట పరిశీలించండి:
(1) కొటేషన్లు చూపడానికి ఉపయోగిస్తారు.
Keats says, ‘A thing of beauty is a joy for ever’.
(2) ఒక condition ను గాని, ఒక time ని గాని తెలియజేయు clauses లో Simple Future Tense కు బదులుగా దీనిని వాడతారు.
I shall wait till you finish your lunch.
If it rains we shall get wet.
(3) Sports ను cover చేసే broadcasting commentaries లో ఒక దాని తరువాత ఇంకొకటిగా సంభవించు సంఘటనలను వివరించుటకు. Present Continuous బదులు, Simple Present ను వాడతారు. ఇచ్చట కాలవ్యవధిపై గాక, ఒక దాని తరువాత ఇంకొకటిగా సంభవించే పరిణామాలపై గ్రామరు భావము కేంద్రీకరింపబడుతుంది.
(4) Present Continuous Tense కు బదులుగా కూడా Simple Present ను వాడతారు.

Present Continuous Tense

219. Present Continuous ఈ విధంగా వాడతారు:
(1) మాట్లాడే సమయంలో జరుగుతున్న సంఘటనను గురించి చెప్పడానికి
She is singing (now).
The boys are playing hockey.
(2) మాట్లాడే సమయంలోని తాత్కాలిక సంఘటనను వివరించడానికి. అది ఆ సమయంలో సంభసించక పోయినను ఈ rule వర్తిస్తుంది.
I am reading ‘David Copperfield’ (but I am not reading at this moment).
(3) ఇంకొంచెం సేపటిలో ప్రారంభింపబోవు programme ను వివరించడానికి:
I am going to the cinema tonight.
My uncle is arriving tomorrow.

220. కొన్నిసార్లు Present Continuous verb ని always, continually, constantly అను పదములతో కలిపి వాడతాము.
My dog is very silly; he is always running out into the road.

221. ఈ క్రింది verb పదములను సాధారణ పరిస్థితులలో continuous form లో వాడము.
(1) Verbs of perception, e.g., see, hear, smell, notice, recognize,
(2) Verbs of appearing, e.g., appear, look, seem.
(3) Verbs of emotion, e.g., want, wish, desire, feel, like, love, hate, hope, refuse, prefer.
(4) Verbs of thinking, e.g., think, suppose, believe, agree, consider, trust, remember, forget, know.. understand, imagine, mean, mind.
(5) have (= possess), own, possess, belong to, contain, consist of, be (except when used in the passive).
e.g.

WrongRight
These grapes are tasting sour.These grapes taste sour.
I am thinking you are wrong.I think you are wrong.
She is seeming sad.She seems sad.
He is having a cellular phone.He has a cellular phone.

“కాని పైన ఉదహరించిన క్రియా పదములను, చిన్న చిన్న మార్పులకు గాను continuous tense form లో వాడవచ్చును.
She is tasting the soup to see if it needs more salt,
(taste = test the flavour of)
I am thinking of going to Malaysia,
(think of = consider the idea of)
They are having lunch, (have= eat)

Present Perfect Tense

222. Present Perfect ని ఇలా వాడెదము :
(1) ఇప్పుడే పూర్తికాబడిన గతంలోని కార్యక్రమమును తెలియజేయుటకు.
He has just gone out.
It has just struck ten.
(2) కాలనిర్ణయం చూపించకుండా గతంలో జరిగిపోయిన సంఘటనలను తెలియజేయుటకు.
Have you read ‘Gulliver’s Travels”?
I have never known him to be angry.
Mr. Hari has been to Japan.
(3) గతించిన కాలములో సంభవించి, వాని ప్రభావము యిప్పటికీ మనం అనుభవించుచున్నపుడు:- Gopi has eaten all the biscuits (i.e., there aren’t any left for you).
I have cut my finger (and it is bleeding now).
I have finished my work (= now I am free)..
(4) గతంలో సంభవించిన సంఘటన యిప్పటికీ continue అవుచున్నపుడు : (since మరియు for – phrases *)
I have known him for a long time.
He has been ill since last week.
We have lived here for ten years.
We haven’t seen Padma for several months.

223. ప్రశ్నలు వేయునపుడు never, ever అను పదములతోను మరియు negative అర్ధం వచ్చు సందర్భములలోను ఇంకను ప్రశ్నలు వేయునపుడు so far, till now, yet అను పదములతోను, already, today, this week, this month అను యితర పదములతోను కలిపి Present Perfect ను వాడవచ్చును. గమనిక (Note): Present Perfect ను past tense లోనున్న adverbs తో కలిపి వాడరాదు.
‘He has gone to Kolkata yesterday’. Wrong
Say ‘He went to Kolkata yesterday’..

Present Perfect Continuous Tense

224. గతించిన కాలములో ప్రారంభింపబడి, ప్రస్తుతం గూడా Continue అవుచున్న కార్యానికి Present
Perfect Continuous tense ను వాడతాము.
He has been sleeping for five hours (and is still sleeping). They have been building the bridge for several months.
They have been playing since four o’clock.

225. ఇప్పటికిప్పుడే పూర్తిగావించ బడిన action కు గూడా Present Perfect Continuous tense ను వాడతాము. ఇచ్చట ఇంకొక సంబంధిత కార్యక్రమాన్ని వివరించడానికి ఈ tense ఉపయోగపడుతుంది. Why are your clothes so wet ?’ ‘1 have been watering the garden’.

Past Tenses

Simple Past Tense

226. గతించిన కాలములో ప్రారంభింపబడి ఆ గతించిన కాలములో పూర్తిగావింపబడిన action కు Simple Past tense ను వాడతాము. ఈ సందర్భములో adverb ను గాని adverb phrases ను గాని
వాడతాము.
The steamer sailed yesterday.
I received his letter a week ago.
She left school last year.

227. కొన్ని సందర్భములలో ఈ Simple Past tense ను adverb of time లేకుండా గూడా వాడతాము. కాని అక్కడ ఉన్న సందర్భాన్నిబట్టి కాలము యొక్క గుర్తింపు అచ్చట రావాలి.
I learnt Hindi in Nagpur.
I didn’t sleep well (i.e., last night).
Babar defeated Rana Sanga at Kanwaha.

228. గతించిన కాలములోని మన పాత అలవాట్లను చెప్పుకోవడానికి కూడా ఈ Simple Past tense ను ప్రయోగిస్తాము. అటువంటప్పుడు, సందర్భమును బట్టి సమయము నిఘూడంగా అర్ధమగును. He studied many hours everyday.
She always carried an umbrella. Past Continuous Tense

229. గతించిన కాలములోనే ప్రారంభింపబడి అలానే ఆ గతించిన కాలములోనే నడుస్తూ ఉన్న action కు Past Continuous tense ను వాడతాము. ఇచ్చట ఎంతకాలం అలా continue అయ్యింది అనే విషయం పేర్కొనవలసిన పని లేదు.
We were listening to the radio all evening.
It was getting darker.
The light went out while I was reading.
When I saw him, he was playing chess.
పైన పేర్కొనబడిన నిర్వచనములో, ఒక సుదీర్ఘ కాలగమనంలో కొనసాగిన ఒక action మధ్యలో ఒక కొత్త action వచ్చినపుడు Past Continuous tense ను మరియు simple past ను వాడడం జరిగింది. ఈ విధంగా మధ్యలో చూపబడిన action కు simple past ను వాడినాము.

230. ఈ tense ను always, continually, etc. అను పదములతో కలిపి దీర్ఘకాలపు అలవాట్లను గురించి చెప్పడానికి కూడా వాడెదము.
He was always grumbling.

Past Perfect Tense
231. గతించిన కాలములో ప్రారంభింపబడి అదే కాలములో పూర్తికాబడిన action కు Past Perfect Tense ను వాడతాము.
I met him in New Delhi in 1996. I had seen him last five years before.

232. గతించిన కాలములో రెండు సంఘటనలు జరిగి ఉంటే, ఏది ముందుది ఏది వెనకది అని ముందు గ్రహించాలి. ఈ పరిస్థితిలో మనకు Past Perfect Tense అందుబాటులోకి వస్తుంది. మొదటి సంఘటనకు Past Perfect Tense ను వాడతాము.
When I reached the station the train had started (so | couldn’t get into the train).
I had done my exercise when Hari came to see me.
I had written the letter before he arrived.

Past Perfect Continuous Tense233. గతించిన కాలములోనే ప్రారంభింపబడి మరియు ఆ గతించిన కాలములోనే కొంత కాలం వరకు అడ్డులేకుండా ముందుకు సాగిపోవుచున్న action ను వివరించడానికి Past Perfect Continuous
Tense ను వాడతాము.
At that time he had been writing a novel for two months.
When Mr. Mukerji came to the school in 1995, Mr. Anand had already been teaching there for five years.

|అభ్యాసము 46
క్రింద ఇవ్వబడిన ఖాళీలలో తగిన verb form ను పూరింపుము.

1. The earth________ round the sun. (move, moves, moved)
2.My friends________ the Prime Minister yesterday, (see, have seen, saw)
3. I__ him only one letter up to now. (sent, have sent, send)
4. She__worried about something. (looks, looking, is looking)
5. It started to rain while we____________ tennis. (are playing, were playing, had played)
6. He______________ fast when the accident happened. (is driving, was driving, drove)
7. He______________asleep while ho was driving. (falls, fell, has fallen)
8. I’m sure I him_____ at the party last night. (saw, have seen, had seen).
9. He__________ a mill in this town. (have, has, is having)
10. He___________ here for the last five years. (worked, is working, has been working).
11. He thanked me lor what I ______(have done, had done, have been doing).
12.I_____________a strange noise. (hear, am hearing, have been hearing)
13.I_____________him for a long time. (know, have known, am knowing)
14.I_____________English for five years. (study, am studying, have been studying)
15.Don’t disturb me. I_________ my homework. (do, did, am doing)
16.Abdul_____________ to be a doctor. (wants, wanting, is wanting)
17. The soup____good. (taste, tastes, is tasting).
18.He _____TV most evenings. (watches, is watch, is watching)
19.He______________out five minutes ago. (has gone, had gone, went)
20. When he lived in Hyderabad, he to the cinema once a week. (goes, went, was going)
21. The baby ______all morning. (cries, has been crying)
22.I______Rahim at the zoo. (saw, have seen, had seen)
23.I_______Kumar this week. (haven’t seen, did’t see, am not seeing)
24. This paper______ twice weekly. (is appearing, appearing, appears)
25. Ashok fell off the ladder when he______ the roof. (is mending, was mending, mended)

అభ్యాసము 47
క్రింద brackets లో ఇవ్వబడిన వాటిలో సరియైన పదమును ఎంచుకొనుము.
1. The Headmaster. to speak to you. (wants, is wanting, was wanting)
2. I a new bicycle last week. (bought, have bought, had bought)
3. Here are your shoes; I them. (just clean, just cleaned, have just cleaned)
4. It since early morning. (rained, is raining, has been raining)
5.I___ a lot of work ioday. (did, have done, had done)
6. I____________something burning. (smell, am smelling, have been smelling)
7. Look! The sun over the hills. (rises, is rise, is rising)
8. She__unconscious since four o’clock. (is, was, has been)
9. He used to visit us every week, but he now. (rarely comes, is rarely coming, has rarely come)
10. We for his call since 4.20. (are waiting, have been waiting, were waiting)
11. Everyday last week my aunt a plate, (breaks, broke, was breaking)
12. I know all about that film because I it twice. (saw, have seen, had seen)
13. Our guests: they are sitting in the garden, (arrived, have arrived, had arrived)
14. I him since we met a year ago. (didn’t see, haven’t seen, hadn’t seen)
15. We__our breakfest half an hour ago. (finished, have finished, had finished)
16.She jumped off the bus while it_ (moved, had moved, was moving)
17. When we went to the cinema, the film (already started, had already started, would already start)
18. for half an hour when it suddenly started to rain. (have walked, have been walking, had been walking)
19. Did you think you me somewhere before? (have seen, had seen, were seeing)
20. The town its appearance completely since 1980. (is changing, changed, has changed)
21. Sheila her case, look. (packed, has packed, had packed)
22. When I was in Sri Lanka, I Negombo, Beruwela and Nilaveli. (visited, was visited, have visited)
23.I meant to repair the radio, but __time to do it today. (am not having, haven’t had, hadn’t)
24. When I my dinner I went to bed. (had, have had, had had)
25.Mento  abolish wars up to now, but maybe they will find a way in the future, (never managed, have never managed, will have never managed)

అధ్యాయము 26

The Future

234. భవిష్యత్తు Tense ను గురించి మాట్లాడడానికి English లో చాలా పద్ధతులు ఉన్నవి. Simple Future Tense : “going to” అనే జంట పదములను వాడుట ద్వారా మరియు Simple Present ను Simple Future గా మార్పిడి చేసి వాడుట అను ఈ మూడు పద్ధతులు అవి.
Simple Future Tense

235. మన ఆధీనములోనికి రానట్టి పరిణామాల గురించి మాట్లాడేటప్పుడు Simple Future Tense ను వాడతాము. ఈ సందర్భములో ఇచ్చట భావమును fact గా గమనించదగును.
I shall be twenty next Saturday.
It will be Diwali in a week.
We will know our exam results in May.

236. మనం ఏదైతే ఆలోచిస్తామో, ఏదైతే భవిష్యత్తులో సంభవిస్తుందని ఊహించుతామో అట్టి దానిని గురించి మాట్లాడునపుడు Simple Future Tense అనగా దానికి తగిన క్రియా పదము (verb) ను ఉపయోగిస్తాము.
I think Pakistan will win the match.
I’m sure Helen will get a first class.
As in the above sentences, we often use this tense with / think, and I’m sure. We also say I expect .! believe, Probably. etc.

237. మాట్లాడేటప్పుడు ఏ పని చేస్తామో, ఏ పని జరుగుతుందో ఆ విషయమును తెలియజేయడానికి ఈ tense ను ఉపయోగిస్తాము.
It is raining. I will take an umbrella.
“Mr. Sinha is very busy at the moment.” – “All right. I’ll wait

Going to
238. మనం ఒక పని చెయ్యాలని నిశ్చయించుకొన్నప్పుడు, ఆ పని యొక్క ప్రారంభదశలో “going to” అనే జంట పదాలను ఉపయోగించి వానికి verb యొక్క ధాతు రూపాన్ని జత చేస్తాము. ధాతువు word అనగా root word అనుకోవచ్చును. Be యొక్క భావాన్ని ధాతువుగా తీసుకొనవచ్చును.
“Have you decided what to do?” “Yes. I am going to resign the job” “Why do you want to sell your motorbike?” – “I’m going to buy a car.”
ఇచ్చట ఈ విషయం గుర్తుంచుకోవాలి. మన ఆలోచనలో నున్న భావాన్ని కార్యరూపంలో పెట్టడానికి అన్ని ప్రయత్నాలూ చేసిన దశలో “going to” ను వాడతాము. (I’m going to buy) అప్పటికప్పుడే తీసుకొన్న నిర్ణయానికి మాత్రం Simple Future Tense వాడాలి.

239. మున్ముందు జరగబోయే విషయాన్ని, ఏదైతే నిశ్చయంగా జరుగుతుందని అనుకుంటామో వాటిని గురించి మనం మాట్లాడే సమయంలో కూడా “going to” అనే జంట పదాలను వాడతాము. అదే సమయంలో (అదే present tense time లో) ఆ సంభవించే పరిణామంపై కొంత నమ్మకం గూడా ఉండాలి.
It is going to rain; look at those clouds.
The boat is full of water, It is going to sink.
She is going to have a baby.

240. క్షణంలో ప్రారంభం కానున్న action ను కూడా “going to ” అను జంట పదాలు express చేస్తవి.
Let’s get into the train. It’s going to leave.
Look! The cracker is going to explode. Be about to

241. క్షణంలో ప్రారంభంకానున్న future action గురించి Be about to + (base form of verb) BAUTUR  చెబుతుంది.
Let’s get into the train. It’s about to leave.
Don’t go out now. We are about to have lunch.

Simple Present Tense
242. Official programmes, timetables 30g Simple Present Tense ను వాడతారు.
The college opens on 23rd June.
The film starts at 6.30 and finishes at 9.00.
When does the next train leave for Chennai?

243. If, unless, when, while, as (=while) before, after, until, by the time and as soon as అను పదములతో ప్రారంభించబడిన clauses ను భవిష్యత్తుభావము కావలసినపుడు, Simple Future Tense అవి Future Tense కొరకు ఉద్దేశింపబడినను Simple Future Tense లో రాయబడవు.
I won’t go out if it rains. (not: will rain)
Can I have some milk before I go to bed?
Let’s wait till he finishes his work.
Please ring me up as soon as he comes.

Present Continuous Tense
244. భవిష్యత్తులో మనము ప్రారంభింపబోవు కార్యాన్ని గురించి మనము ప్రస్తుతం మాట్లాడునపుడు గూడా Present Continuous Tense ను వాడతాము.
I am going to Shimla tomorrow.
We are eating out tonight.
Mr. Abdul Rehman is arriving this evening.
నీ వ్యక్తిగత arrangements ను దృష్టిలో పెట్టుకొని Present Continuous Tense verb ను వాడవలసిందిగా ఇచ్చట చెప్పడమైనది.

Future Continuous Tense
245. భవిష్యత్తులో ఒక నిర్దిష్టమైన సమయంలో ప్రారంభింపబడి కొంతకాలం కొనసాగే కార్యక్రమాలకు మనము Future Continuous Tense ను వాడతాము.
I suppose it will be raining when we start.
This time tomorrow I will be sitting on the beach in Singapore.
“Can I see you at 5 o’clock?” “Please don’t come then. I will be watching the tennis match on TV.”

26. భవిష్యత్తులో ప్రారంభింపబోవు కార్యక్రమాలకు గూడా general గా ఈ tense ను వాడతాము.
I will be staying here till Sunday.
He will be meeting us next week.
The postman will be coming soon.

Be To
247. Be to+base form of verbe, og official plans 5, arrangements కు వాడతాము.
Be to is used in a formal style, often in News reports.
Be is usually left out in headlines, e.g. “Prime Minister to visit America”.
వార్తలలోని headlines లో వాడినపుడు ‘be’ ని వదిలివేయటం జరుగుతుంది.

Future Perfect Tense
248. భవిష్యత్తులో ఒక నిర్దిష్ట కాలానికి పూర్తి కాబడే actions కు Future Perfect Tense ను వాడతారు.
I shall have written my exercise by then.
He will have left before you go to see him.
By the end of this month I will have worked here for five years.

Future Perfect Continuous Tense
249. భవిష్యత్తులో Continue అవుతూ ఒక నిర్దిష్ట కాలానికి పూర్తికాబడే actions కు Future Perfect Continuous tense ను వాడతారు. కాని ఈ పద్ధతి ఇప్పుడు అంతగా వాడుకలో లేదు.
By next March we shall have been living here for four years.
I’ll have been teaching for twenty years next July.

అభ్యాసము 48
సరియైన ఒకే ఒక verb తో గాని, లేక బాగా సరిపడే రెండు verbs తో గాని ఈ క్రింది ఖాళీలను పూరించండి.
1. The plane_____at 3.30. (arrives, will arrive)
2. I will phone you when he______back. (comes, will come)
3. When I get home, my dog._________________at the gate waiting for me. (sits, will be sitting)
4. The Joshis this evening.___(visit, am visiting)
5. Look at those black clouds. It (will rain, is going to rain)
6.The train ____before we reach the station. (arrives, will have arrived)
7. Perhaps we______ Mahabaleshwar next month. (visit, will visit)
8. Unless we____now we can’t be on time. (start, will start)
9.I___________into town later on. Do you want a lift? (drive, will be driving)
10. The next term____________on 16th November. (begins, is beginning)
11. Oh dear! I_____(will sneeze, am going to sneeze)
12. By 2005, computers____many of the jobs that people do today. (will be taking over, will have taken over)
13. I’m sure she_____the exam. (passes, will pass)
14. I_____________home next Sunday. (go, am going)
15. I_________you one of these days, I expect. (see, will be seeing)
16. Help! I__________fall. (will fall, am going to fall)
17. She has bought some cloth; she herself a blouse. (will make, is going to make)
18. I your house this afternoon. It is on my way home from work. (will be passing, am passing)
19. Hurry up! The programme (will start, is about to start)
20. This book is not long. I it by lunch time, (will be reading, will have read)

అధ్యాయము 27

The Verb: Person And Number

250. Personal Pronouns, Verb  Persons. First, Second మరియు Third person. అందువలన ఈ క్రింది విధముగా వాక్యాలను రాసెదము :
1. I speak.
2. You speak. (Old English: Thou speakest.)
3. He speaks.

మొదటి వాక్యములో Subject, First Person లో ఉన్నది. కావున Verb కూడా First Person లో ఉన్నది.
రెండవ వాక్యములో, Subject, Second Person లో ఉన్నది. కావున Verb కూడా Second Person లో నున్నది.
మూడవ వాక్యములో Subject, Third Person అనగా (He, she, they etc.) లో ఉన్నది. కావున Verb కూడా Third Person లో ఉన్నది.
Verb కు Subject కు ఎప్పుడూ ఒకే person formation ఉంటుంది.

251 . Noun, Pronoun కు లాగానే, Verb కు కూడా Singular, Plural (ఏకవచన, బహువచన రూపాలు) ఉంటవి. ఏకవచనములో S వస్తుంది. బహువచనములో రాదు.
1. He speaks.
2. They speak.
ఇచ్చట మొదటి వాక్యములో Subject లోని ఏకవచన బహువచన రూపాలు ఎలా ఉంటవో చూపబడినది. మొదటి వాక్యములో Subject (కర్త) ఏక వచనములో ఉన్నది. కావున verb కూడా ఏకవచనములో ఉన్నది. రెండవ వాక్యములో Subject (కర్త) బహువచన రూపములో నున్నది. కావున verb కూడా బహువచనములో నున్నది.
దీని వలన మనకు Subject మరియు verb పదములు రెండున్నూ ఒకే number కలిగి ఉంటవి అని
అర్ధం అవుతుంది. అనగా verb పదము, number మరియు person విషయములలో Subject తో ఏకీభవించి ఉంటుంది.

252. First Person Second Person, Third Person విషయాలలో కూడా, subject (కర్త) కు verb కు అనుబంధం ఉంటుంది. కావున ఈ క్రింది రూల్సును (నిబంధనలు) గ్రామరు మనకు ప్రతిపాదించింది. Verb పదము, subject తో number విషయంలోను మరియు person విషయములోనూ ఏకరూపం కలిగి యుండవలయును.
(a) Subject singular number 8 first person wood, verb sa singular number మరియు first person అయి ఉండాలి.
I am here.
I was there.
I have a bat.
I play cricket.
(b) Subject 3singular number 8 third person wood, verb sa singular number మరియు third person అయి ఉండాలి.
He is here.
He was there.
He has a bat.
He plays cricket.
(c) Subject పదము plural number మరియు third person అయి ఉంటే, verb పదము కూడా plural number మరియు third person అయి ఉండాలి.
They are here.
They were there.
They have bats.
They play cricket.

గమనిక (Note) :  Modern English లో Verb పదములకు Number (ఏకవచన, బహువచన రూపములు) మరియు Person భేదములు (నీవు, నేను, అతడు మొ.) inflection కు సంబంధించి అంతరించినవి. These are called inflections in English. Third person singular లో ఈ మార్పు రాలేదు.
Inflection అనగా word రూపములో మార్పు రావడం.
I speak.
We speak.
You speak. You speak. (You is both singular and plural in current English.)
He speaks. They speak. (Third person singular లోని verb లో మార్పు వచ్చినది గమనించండి.)
The only exception is the verb to be. We say-
I am.
You are.
He is ..
We are.
You are.
They are.
Subject and verb agreement (సవివరణ) Book ll chapter 17 లో కలదు.

అధ్యాయము 28
THE INFINITIVE
253. ఈ క్రింది వాక్యములను చదవండి :
I want to go.
They tried to find fault with us. “to go” మరియు “to find” అను జంట పదములను “infinitives” అని అంటారు. Infinitive verb నకు పునాది రాయి వంటిది. చాలాసార్లు దీని వెనువెంటనే “to” అను పదము ఉంటుంది.

254 ఈ క్రింది వాక్యములను చదవండి:
1. To err is human,
2. Birds love to sing.
3. To respect our parents is our duty.
4. He refused to obey the orders. MIHTO SU
5. Many men desire to make money quickly.
మొదటి వాక్యములో Infinitive అయిన “To err” అను పదము subject (కర్త) గా act చేయుచున్నది. మరియు అది “is” అను verb ను తన object (కర్మ) గా తీసుకొనుచున్నది.
రెండవ వాక్యములో Infinitive అయిన “to sing” అను పదము “love” అను verb పదమునకు object గా నున్నది.
మూడవ వాక్యములో Infinitive అయిన “to respect” verb అయిన “is” కు subject గా నున్నది. కాని ఒకో సందర్భములో అది verb లాగా ఒక object ను తీసుకుంటుంది కూడా.
నాలుగవ వాక్యములో Infinitive అయిన “to obey” noun మాదిరిగా “Refused” అను verb కు object గా పనిచేయుచున్నది.
ఐదవ వాక్యములో Infinitive అయిన “to make” అను పదము, noun లాగానే, verb అయిన “desire” అను పదమునకు object గా నుండి adverb చేత అజమాయిషీ చెయ్యబడుతుంది.
Infinitive ని verb లక్షణాలున్న noun గా చెప్పవచ్చును. Verb పదము transitive గా ఉండి తనకొక object ను తీసుకొనును, infinitive పదమునకు verb noun లక్షణాలు వచ్చును.

255 “To” అను పదాన్ని Infinitive లో బహుళంగా వాడతాము. కాని అది Infinitive లో మరీ అంత ప్రాముఖ్యమైనట్టిది గాదు. ఈ విధంగా, bid, let, make, ‘need, *dare, see, hear అను పదముల
తరువాత “10” ను వాడము.
Bid him go there.
I bade him go.
Let him sit here.
I will not let you go.
Make him stand.
I made him run.
but phot utilith 38 (abbr)
We need not go to-day.
You need not do it.
You dare not do it.
I saw him do it.
I heard him cry.
Except when they are conjugated with do.

256. Will, would, shall, should, may, might, can, could, must án éré infinitive ను “to” లేకుండా వ్రాయుదుము.
I will pay the bill.
You should work harder.
He can speak live languages.
You must come to the office at nine tomorrow.

Had better, had rather, would rather, sooner than, rather than  infinitive లో “to” ఉండదు.
You had better ask permission.
I had rather play than work.
I would rather die than suffer so.

Use Of The Infinitive

257. Infinitive ను దానికి తోడుగా ఏ పదమైనా ఉన్నా లేకపోయినా, Noun లాగా ఈ క్రింద చూపిన
పద్ధతులలో వాడెదరు.
(1) Verb & Subject m
To find fault is easy.
To err is human.
To reign is worth ambition.
(2) Transitive Verb & Object m
I do not mean to read.
He likes to play cards.
(3) Verbs Complement
Her greatest pleasure is to sing.
His custom is to ride daily.
(4) Preposition & Object m
He had no choice but (= except) to obey.
The speaker is about to begin.
(5) Objective గా నుండి Preposition గా నుండుట :
I saw him go.
Infinitive ను పై విధములగా Noun గా వాడినపుడు, దానిని Simple Infinitive అంటారు.

 

258. Infinitive ని ఈ క్రింది విధంగా కూడా వాడతాము.
(1) ఒక purpose ను (నిర్దిష్ట విధానము) తెలియజేయు సందర్భములో Verb ను qualify చేయుటకు (వివరించుటకు)
He called to see my brother (- for the purpose of seeing my brother).
We eat to live. (Purpose)
I come to bury Caesar. (Purpose)
He wept to see the desolation caused by the flood. (Cause) (2) Adjective ను (విశేషణమును) qualify చేయుటకు:
Figs are good to eat.
This medicine is pleasant to take.
The boys are anxious to learn.
He is too ill to do any work.
(3) నామవాచకమును (Noun ను) qualify చేయుటకు:
This is not the time to play. You will have cause to repent. He is a man to be admired.
Here is a house to let.
This house is to let.
(4) ఒక వాక్యమును వివరించుటకు:
To tell the truth, I quite forgot my promise.
He was petrified, so to speak.
Infinitive ను పై విధముగా వాడినపుడు దానిని Gerundial లేక Qualifying Infinitive అని అంటారు. మొదటి 1,2 వాక్యములలో Gerundial Infinitive తాను adverb గా పనిచేయుచున్నది. మూడవ వాక్యములో అది Adjective పనిని చేయుచున్నది. నాలుగవ వాక్యములో అది తన స్వభావాన్ని పూర్తిగా చూపుతుంది.

259. Infinitive, active voice ‘m passive voice moto. Active voice m నున్నపుడు అది పూర్తిగా present tense గా గాని, present perfect గా గాని ఉంటుంది. మరియు కేవలం అచ్చట జరిగిన పనిని మాత్రం చెబుతూంది. లేక continue అయ్యే action ను గురించిగూడా చెబుతుంది. ACTIVE
Present:
Perfect :
Present Continuous:
Perfect Continuous:
to love.
to have loved.
to be loving.
to have been loving.
Infinitive passive గా నున్నపుడు present మరియు perfect forms లో మాత్రమే ఉంటుంది.
Present:
Perfect:
to be loved.
PASSIVE
to have been loved.

అభ్యాసము 49
ఈ క్రింద ఇవ్వబడిన వాక్యములలో Infinitive ఎలా వాడబడిందో తెలుపుము.

1. There was nothing for it to fight.
2. Let us pray.
3. The mango is fit to eat.
4. I heard her sing.
5. I have come to see you.
6. The order to advance was given.
7. Men must work and women must weep.
8. I am sorry to hear this.
9. He is slow to forgive.
10. A man severe he was and stern to view.
11. And fools who came to scoff remained to pray.
12. Thus to relieve the wretched was his pride.
13. Full many a flower is born to blush unseen.
14. Music hath charms to soothe the savage beast.
15. Never seek to tell thy love.
16. To retreat was difficult; to advance was impossible.
17. Everybody wishes to enjoy life.
18. My desire is to see you again.
19. There was not a moment to be lost.
20. The counsel rose to address the court.
21. My right there is none to dispute.
22. The ability to laugh is peculiar to mankind.
23. He has the power to concentrate his thoughts.
24. He was quick to see the point.
25. I am not afraid to speak the truth.
26. Better dwell in the midst of alarms Than reign in this horrible place.
27. Can you hope to count the stars?
28. To toil is the lot of mankind.
29. It is delightful to hear the sound of the sea.
30. It is a penal offence to bribe a public servant

అభ్యాసము 50
Infinitive ను ఉపయోగించి క్రింద ఇచ్చిన జంట వాక్యములను కలుపుము.
[Example. – Napoleon was one of the greatest of generals. He is universally acknowledged so. Napoleon is universally acknowledged to have been one of the greatest of generals. Note – I will be noticed that we have turned one of the sentences into a phrase containing an infinitive.]
1. He did not have even a rupee with him. He could not buy a loaf of bread.
2. Every cricket team has a captain. He directs the other players.
3. You must part with your purse. On this condition only you can save your life.
4. He went to Amritsar. He wanted to visit the Golden Temple.
5. The robber took out a knife. He intended to frighten the old man.
6. I speak the truth. I am not afraid of it.
7. The insolvent’s property was sold by the official Assignee. The insolvent’s creditors had to be paid.
8. He wants to earn his livelihood. He works hard for that reason.
9. The strikers held a meeting. They wished to discuss the terms of the employers.
10. He has five children. He must provide for them.
11. The old man has now little energy left. He cannot take his morning constitutional exercises.
12. The Rajah allowed no cows to be slaughtered in his territory. It was his custom.
13. He formed a resolution. It was to the effect that he would not speculate any more.
14. Everyone should do his duty. India expects this of every man.
15. She visits the poor. She is anxious to relieve them of their sufferings.
16. He collects old stamps even at great expense. This is his hobby.
17. He must apologise for his misconduct, it is the only way to escape punishment.
18. I have no aptitude for business. I must speak it out frankly.
19. He was desirous of impressing his host. So he was on his best behaviour in his presence.
20. That young man has squandered away all his patrimony. He must have been very foolish.
21. He has risen to eminence from poverty and obscurity. It is highly creditable.

అధ్యాయము 29
260. ఈ వాక్యాన్ని చదవండి:
Hearing the noise, the boy woke up.
Hearing అనే పదము నామవాచకము అయిన boy అను పదమును వివరిస్తుంది (qualifying). ఎటువంటి బాలుడు? వినుచున్న బాలుడు అని అర్ధం చేసుకోవాలి. ఇది adjective చేసే పని. ఈ hearing అనే పదము Verb అయిన hear అనే పదము నుండి పుట్టినది. తదుపరి తన object ను (కర్మపదము) అజమాయిషీ చేస్తుంది (governs). కావున ఇచ్చట hearing అనే పదము Verb మరియు adjective లక్షణములు కలిగియున్నది. దీనిని Participle అంటాము. ఇచ్చట దీనిని Verbal Adjective అని కూడా
అంటాము.
Def. (నిర్వచనం) : – Participle అనే పదము Verb లో భాగముగా నుండి Verb మరియు adjective ల పనిని చేస్తుంది. లేక Participle కొంత వరకు Verb మరియు adjectiveఅయి ఉన్నది అని కూడా చెప్పవచ్చును.
గమనిక (Note): ‘Hearing the noise’ అనే పదజాలము participle చేత పరిచయము చేయబడి (introduced) participle phrase అని పిలవబడుచున్నది. కాని పై వాక్యములో అది Adjective Phrase. 261. Participle కు సంబంధించిన ఈ క్రింది వాక్యములను చూడండి :
1. We met a girl carrying a basket of flowers.
2. Loudly knocking at the gate, he demanded admission.
3.The child, thinking all was safe, attempted to cross the road.
4.He rushed into the field, and foremost fighting fell.

పై examples అన్నీ కూడా Present Participles. ఇవి అన్నీ కూడా – ing తో అంతమగుచున్నవి. ఇవి నడచుచున్న action ను గురించియు, సంపూర్ణముగాచేయని action ను గురించియు వివరించును. ఈ మూలక పదమైన verb, transitive అయి ఉంటే, మొదటి వాక్యములో లాగా అది ఒక object ను (కర్మ పదమును) తీసుకుంటుంది. రెండవ వాక్యములో Participle ను adverb విశ్లేషిస్తుంది (అనగా వివరిస్తుంది). Loudly అనునది adverb కదా.

262. Present Participle కు అనుబంధంగా, Past Participle కూడా ఉన్నది. Past Participle పూర్తి అయిన action ను గురించి గాని ఒక పరిస్థితిని గురించిన వివరణను గాని తెలియజేస్తుంది.
ఉదాహరణలు :-
Blinded by a dust storm, they fell into disorder.
Deceived by his friends, he lost all hope.
Time misspent is time lost.
Driven by hunger, he stole a piece of bread.
We saw a few trees laden with fruit.
Participle సాధారణంగా – ed, d, t, – en, – ౧ లతో end అవుతుంది.
ఈ Present Participle మరియు Past Participle కాక మనకు Perfect Participle అనే ఇంకొకటి కూడా ఉన్నది. ఇది గతించిన కాలములో సంపూర్ణముగా పూర్తి కాబడిన action ను (చర్య) ను గురించి చెబుతూంది.

263. ఈ క్రింది ఉదాహరణలలో Participle ను simple qualifying (వివరించు) adjectives గా noun కు ముందు భాగంలో వాడడం జరిగింది. ఈ విధముగా వాడిన సందర్భములో దానిని Participle Adjectives అని అంటాము.
A rolling stone gathers no moss.
We had a drink of the sparkling water.
His tattered coat needs mending. The creaking door awakened the dog. A lying witness ought to be punished. He played a losing game.A burnt child dreads the fire.
His finished manners produced a very favourable impression. He wears a worried look.
Education is the most pressing need of our country.
He was reputed to be the most leamed man of his time.
ఉన్నవి. Most అనునది comparitive degree క్రిందికి వస్తుంది కదా!
A cho bé e Gamevog) dagab Lacr
examples & Participle degrees ol comparison (adjectives & Sг88)

264. Adjective 35 past participle
Passive voice
ఇస్తుంది మరియు Present Participle పదము Active voice భావాన్ని ఇస్తుంది.
a spent swimmer a swimmer who is tired out;
(stoff) beca
a burnt child = a child who is burnt;
botini)
Good
a painted doll = a doll which is painted;
a rolling stone = a stone which rolls.

265. ఇంతవరకు చదివిన Participle భావాలను ఈ క్రింద సంక్షిప్తంగా ఇవ్వడం జరిగింది :
(1) Participle 38 verbal Adjective.
(2) అది Verb మాదిరిగా noun లేక pronoun ను govern చేయును. ఈ విధంగా :-
Hearing the noise, the boy woke up.
[The noun noise is governed by the participle Hearing]. (3) Verb మాదిరిగా adverb చేత అది modify చేయబడును. Loudly knocking at the gate, he demanded admission. [Here the participle knocking is modified by the adverb Loudly.]
(4) Adjective మాదిరిగా noun లేక pronoun ను వర్ణించును. ఈ విధంగా :- Having rested, the men continued their journey.
(5) Adjective మాదిరిగా అది comparative degree కలిగి ఉండును. చూడండి: Education is the most pressing need of our time.
[Here the participle pressing is compared by prefixing most.]

266. Participle vs 225 artev :-
Active
Present: loving
Perfect: having loved
USE OF THE
Passive
Present: being loved. Perfect: having been loved. Past: loved.

267. Continuous Tenses (Active Voice) e tenses o ‘be’ verb కూడిన Present Participle నుండి ఏర్పడును.
I am loving.
I was loving.
I shall be loving.
Perfect Tenses (Active Voice లో) అన్నియూ ఆయా Tenses కు చెందిన ‘have’ verb తో కూడిన Past Participles నుండి ఏర్పడును.
I have loved.
I had loved.
I shall have loved. Passive Voice మాత్రము అయా tenses కు చెందిన ‘be’ verb తో కూడిన Past Participles నుండి
-ఏర్పడును.
I am loved.
I was loved.
I shall be loved.

268. Participles నామవాచక పదములను, సర్వనామపదములను కూడా quality చేయునని చదివి యుంటిమి. వానిని ఈ విధముగా ప్రయోగించవచ్చును.
(1) వివరణ రూపంలో (Attributively)
A rolling stone gathers no moss.
His tattered coat needs mending.
A lost opportunity never returns.
(2) ఊహా రూపకమైన భావములకు (Predicatively)
The man seems worried. (Modifying the Subject)
He kept me waiting. (Modifying the Object.)
(3) Noun ను గాని pronoun ను గాని సంపూర్ణ భావముతో ముందున పెట్టుకొనినపుడు :
The weather being fine, I went out.
Many having arrived, we were freed from anxiety.
Weather permitting, there will be a garden party at Government House tomorrow.
God willing, we shall have another good monsoon.
The sea being smooth, we went for sail.
The wind having failed, the crew set to work with a will.
His master being absent, the business was neglected.
The wind being favourable, they embarked.
పై వాక్యములలో Participle మరియు దానికి ముందున నున్న noun తో గాని pronoun తో గాని కలిసి ఒక independent phrase గానగుచున్నది. మిగతా వాక్యముతో సంబంధము ఉండదు. దానిని Absolute Phrase అంటారు. ఆ Absolute Phrase లో నున్న noun ను గాని pronoun ను గాని Nominative Absolute అంటారు.

269. పైన ఉదహరించిన Absolute phrase ను subordinate clause గా తేలికగా మార్చవచ్చు. Spring advancing, the swallows appear. When spring advances. – Clause of Time.] The sea being smooth, we went for a sail. (Because the sea was smooth. God willing, we shall meet again. (If God is willing. – Clause of Condition.).
– Clause of Reason.]

270. Participle ను verb-adjective అని అంటాము. కావున, అది ఎప్పుడూ noun కు గాని pronoun కు గాని అంటిపెట్టుకొని ఉండవలయును. అనగా అది reference కొరకు తన subject తో కలిసి
ఉండవలయును.
ఈ క్రింది వాక్యములు లోపభూయిష్ట మైనవి. ఎందుకంటే Participle కు సరియైన subject పదము తోడుగా లేదు.
1. Standing at the gate, a scorpion stung him.
(As it is, the sentence reads as if the scorpion was standing at the gate.)
2. Going up the hill, an old temple was seen.
3. Entering the room, the light was quite dazzling.
కావున, పై వాక్యములను ఈ క్రింది విధంగా రాయాలి.

1. Standing at the gate, he was stung by a scorpion.
Or: While he was standing at the gate, a scorpion stung him.
2. When we went up the hill, we saw an old temple.
3. Entering the room, I found the light quite dazzling.
Or: When I entered the room, the light was quite dazzling.

271. Usage (వాడుక సరళి) కొన్ని సార్లు subject యొక్క తోడు లేకుండా participle ను వాడడానికి
ఒప్పుకుంటుంది. అటువంటి participle ను Impersonal Absolute అని అంటారు.
Taking everything into consideration, the Magistrate was perfectly justified in issuing those orders.
Considering his abilities, he should have done better.
Roughly speaking, the distance from here to the nearest railway station is two miles.
పై వాక్యములలో పైకి కనిపించని subject యిదమిద్దము అని చెప్పడానికి వీలుకానట్టిది. కావున “Roughly speaking” అనగా ‘generally అని అర్ధము.

272. ఈ క్రింది వాక్యములలో Participle భావము ఉన్నదని అర్ధం చేసుకొనవచ్చును. Sword (being) in hand, he rushed on the jailor.
Breakfast (having been) over, we went out for a walk.

అభ్యాసము 51
ఈ క్రింద ఇవ్వబడిన వాక్యములలో Present Participle ఏదో Past Participle ఏవో కనుగొని అవి ఏ రకముగా ఉపయోగించబడినవో తెలుపుము.
1. Generally speaking, we receive what we deserve.
2. Having gained truth, keep truth.
3. I saw the storm approaching.
4. Hearing a noise, I turned round.
5. Considering the facts, he received scant justice.
6. The enemy, beaten at every point, fled from the field.
7. Being dissatisfied, he resigned his position.
8. The rain came pouring down in torrents.
9. Having elected him President, the people gave him their loyal support.
10.The traveller, being weary, sat by the woodside to rest.

అభ్యాసము 52
ఈ క్రింద ఇవ్వబడిన వాక్యములలో Present Participle ఏవో Past Participle ఏవో కనుగొని అవి ఏ రకంగా ఉపయోగించబడినవో తెలుపును. но вги ан
1. The fat of the body is fuel laid away for use.
2. Being occupied with important matters, he had no leisure to see us.
3. The children coming home from school look in at the open door.
4. Michael, bereft of his son Luke, died of a broken heart.
5. Books read in childhood seem like old friends.
6. Lessons learned easily are soon forgotten.
7. A word fitly spoken is like apples of gold in pictures (baskets) of silver.
8. mSeeing the sunshine, I threw open the window.
9. Seizing him by the arm, his friend led him away.
10. Encouraged by his wife, he persevered.
11. Overcome by remorse, he determined to atone for his crime by liberality to the church.

Paraphrasing : Definition & Types with Examples in Telugu

by

అధ్యాయము 44

Paraphrasing

Paraphrasing అనగా భావమును వేరే మాటలలో ఇంకొంచం వివరంగా చెప్పుట. ఒక passage ని తన స్వంత మాటలలో, స్వంత style (స్వంత సరళిలో) చెప్పుట అని అర్ధం.

1. Uses Of Paraphrasing

ఒకాయన paraphrasing అంటే good english ని bad english లో చెప్పుట అని హేళనగా అన్నాడట. ఒక వేళ paraphrasing చెడిపోతే, అది paraphrasing తప్పు కాదు. Paraphrasing చేయడంలో తప్పు. విద్యార్థి paraphrasing ను practise చెయ్యాలి. టీచరు వానికి ఆ అలవాటు అలవడేటట్లు చూడాలి. Paraphrasing వలన రెండు ప్రధానమైన ఉపయోగాలు ఉన్నవి.

(a) As an Exercise in composition
(1) విద్యార్థి తాను చదివినది అర్థం చేసుకొని అదే విషయం తెలుసుకోడానికి ఇది ఒక పరీక్ష కావున చదవడంలో, రాయడంలో విద్యార్థికి ఇది ఒక training. భావమేమిటో, అర్ధమేమిటో తెలుసుకోకుండా paraphrasing చెయ్యడం అసాధ్యం.
(2) భావాన్ని చక్కగా వ్యక్తీకరించడానికి paraphrasing ఒక మంచి training అని చెప్పవచ్చును. తను చెప్పదలుచుకున్నది చెప్పడానికి, clear గా సూటిగా చెప్పడానికి యిది చాలా బాగా తోడ్పడుతుంది. Grammer లో తప్పులు దొర్లకుండా, వాడుక భాషలో (Idiomatic language) చెప్పడానికి paraphrasing ఎంతో ఉపయోగపడుతుంది.
“ఒక వ్యక్తి చక్కగా చదవడం, చక్కగా రాయడం నేర్చుకున్నాడంటే అతను మంచి విద్యావంతుడు అని

(b) Paraphrasing వలన రెండవ ఉపయోగం ఏమిటంటే, వ్యక్తికి ఒక భావంపై సరియైన వివరణ యిచ్చే శక్తి వస్తుంది. చిక్కుముడిగానున్న poetry ని విడదీసి, వివరించి చెప్పడం అవడుతుంది. యీ పద్ధతి poetry లో annotations రాయడానికి బాగా ఉపయోగపడుతుంది.
ఉదాహరణకు Palgrave గారు రచించిన “Golden Treasury” (Oxford University Press) లోని note ను చూడండి. ఈ note ను ఆయన Browning గారు రచించిన ఈ క్రింది verse ను గురించి రాశారు.
Enough now, if the Right
And Good and Infinite
Be named here, as thou callest thy hand thine own.
With knowledge absolute,
Subject to no dispute.
From fools that crowded youth, nor let these feel alone.

Paraphrasing Definition And Types with Examples in Telugu

Read and Learn more Written Composition

Note :- ఈ శకంలో మన చేతులపై మనకెంత అవగాహన ఉందో అంతే అవగాహన మనకు Right and Wrong, Good and Evil, the Changing and the Eternal పైన గూడా ఉంటే, అంతవరకు చాలును.

II. ఒక మంచి Paraphrase యొక్క లక్షణాలు
(Chracterstics Of A Good Paraphrase)

1 . Translation. ఒక విధంగా Para Phrasing Translation జాతికి (విధానానికి చెందినది అని కూడా చెప్పవచ్చు. మనకు అవగాహన అయిన translation లో ఒక భాష నుండి ఇంకొక భాషలోనికి తర్జుమా ఉంటుంది. ఇక్కడ translation ఒకే భాషలో ఒకరి భావధోరణి నుండి ఇంకొకరి భావధోరణిలోనికి అదే భాషలో మార్పు చెందుతుంది. సాధారణంగా translation చాలా సునిశితంగా, ఒక విషయాన్ని చక్కని రూపంలో చిత్రించడం ఉంటుంది. అదే విధంగా paraphrase కూడా original passage లోని భావాన్ని రూపంలో మార్పు లేకుండా వివరించడం జరగాలి.
మరీ కటువుగా లేక క్లుప్తంగా ఉన్న passage ని translation లో విడమర్చి భావయుక్తంగా చెప్పాలి. Bacon గారి ఈ క్రింది passage ని పరిశీలించండి. Ag

Prosperity doth best discover vice, but Adversity doth best discover virtue.
Paraphrase.- When a man is prosperous, there is more chance of his bad qualities coming to light; but when he is unfortunate or in trouble, his good qualities are more likely to show themselves.

కేవలం పదగాంభీర్యంతో నిండిన passage ని translation లో కుదింపు చెయ్యాలి. Oxford లో తన lecture లో ఈ విధానాన్ని Ruskin గారు చక్కగా చూపించారు. ఆయన ఇలా చెప్పారు : “Sir, your house is on fire.”

Sydney Smith గారు ఈ క్రింది passage లో ఆయన పెద్ద పెద్ద మాటలు, కేవలం అలంకారప్రాయమైన భాషను వాడారు. దీనిని simple language గా మార్చవలసిన అవసరం ఉంది.

Whoever had the good fortune to see Dr. Parr’s wig, must have observed that, while it tres- passes a little on the orthodox magnitude of perukes in the anterior parts, it scorns even episcopal limits behind, and swells out into a boundless convexity of frizz.

Paraphrase. All who have seen Dr. Parr’s wig must have been struck with its enormous size. Even in front it is larger than the usual style of wig; but behind it is fuller even than the wigs worn by bishops, and swells out into a gigantic round of curls.

2. Fullness. (పరిపూర్ణత) Summary రాసే పద్ధతికి మరియు precis రాసే పద్ధతికి paraphrase ను రూపొందించే పద్ధతికి తేడాలు ఉన్నవి. Paraphrase లో original అర్ధము, వివరణలు, అసలు విషయము. పూర్తిగా ఉంటాయి. అనగా paraphrase full reproduction గా ఉంటుంది. ఈ క్రింది verse ను summary గాను paraphrase గాను చూపించి వివరించడం జరిగింది.

The glories of our blood and state
Are shadows, not substantial things:
There is no armour against fate;
Death lays his icy hand on kings;
Sceptre and Crown kings.
Must tumble down.
And in the dust be equal made
With the poor crooked scythe and spade.

Summary. – High birth and rank are nothing : for in death, which claims all, peasants are equal with

Paraphrase. Nobility of birth and exalted rank, of which men so proudly boast, are mere illusions and quickly pass away. They cannot protect their proud possessors from the common fate of all mankind-death. Even kings, like the meanest of their subjects, must die; and in the grave the poor peasant is equal with the haughty monarch.

Original Passage లో ఉన్న కథా సంగ్రహము యావత్తు నీ స్వంత భావాలను అందులో చొప్పించడానికి వీలు కాదు. Paraphrase లో passage లోని యధార్థం యధార్థంగా ఉంటుంది.

Original passage కి paraphrase కు length విషయంలో ఖచ్చితమైన rules, నిబంధనలు ఏమీ లేవు. కాని paraphrase లో అర్థాన్ని సరిచేయడానికి sentence ను పొడిగించవచ్చు. సాధారణంగా paraphrase original passage అంత గాని, అంత కంటే కొంచం ఎక్కువగా గాని ఉంటుంది.

పైన చెప్పిన ఉదాహరణలో verse కు 45 పదాలు ఉన్నవి. Summary లో 17 పదాలు, paraphrase
లో 56 పదాలు ఉన్నవి.

3. Wholeness. (ఉన్నదంతా ఉంచటం). Paraphrasing చేసేటప్పుడు passage మొత్తాన్ని ఒక unit 30ño. Passage original line original line m, original sentence original sentence ను గాను తీసుకొని దానిని కొత్త పదములతో నింపడం paraphrase కాదు. మొత్తం passage ని, దానిలోని అంతర్గత భావాన్ని ముందుగా గ్రహించాలి. ఆ తరువాత paraphrase ని మొదలు పెట్టాలి. Passage ని ఆ విధంగా రచయిత రాయడానికి గల background ని గ్రహించాలి. ఇది అంత తేలికైన పని కాదు. ఊహా పటిమ ఉండాలి. Imagination ఉండాలి. ఇన్ని లక్షణాలు ఉన్నపుడే చక్కని paraphrase వస్తుంది.

ఈ క్రింది Sonnet ను (పద్యము) మీరు translate చేయబోవుచున్నారు అనుకొందాము.

“Much have I travelled in the realm’s of gold,
And many goodly states and kingdoms seen;
Round many western islands have I been.
Which bards in fealty to Apollo hold.
Oft of one wide expanse had I been told
That deep browed Homer ruled as his demesne;
Yet did I never breathe its pure serene Til!
I heard Chapman speak out loud and bold; –
Then felt I like some watcher of the skies
When a new planet swims into his ken:
Or like stout Cortez, when with eagle eyes.
He stared at the Pacific-and all his men
Looked at each other with a wild surmise –
Silent, upon a peak in Darien.

– Keats

ఇచ్చట mechanical (యాంత్రికంగా) line తర్వాత line ను paraphrase చెయ్యడం కుదరదు. Paraphrasing చేసేటప్పుడు passage యొక్క central meaning ను ముందు అవగాహన చేసుకోవాలి. Central meaning అనగా ఏమిటి? Central meaning ఈ విధంగా ఉంటుంది.

Keats had read widely in English literature, especially poetry, but he knew nothing of the poetic literature of ancient Greece until he read Chapman’s translation of Homer’s Illiad. This was a revelation to him; and as he read, he felt all the wonder and joy felt by an astronomer when he discovers a new star, or an explorer when he discovers an unknown ocean.

4. A Complete Piece of Prose. Paraphrase ను చక్కగా చేసినపుడు అది idiomatic English లో ఉన్న ఒక సరికొత్త నమూనా లా ఉంటుంది. Original passage కి సంబంధం లేకుండా (రచనాశైలిలో) అది నవీనత్వంలో తొణికిసలాడుతూ ఉండాలి. పాఠకులకు అది ఆనందాన్ని కలిగించాలి. చక్కగా అర్ధం కావాలి. Paraphrase యొక్క original ను చదవకుండానే దాని భావం క్షుణ్ణంగా అర్ధం కావాలి.

(గమనిక (Note: Paraphrase కు Explanatory notes అంటూ ఏమీ ఉండరాదు. మనం ఇచ్చే explanation (వివరణ) యావత్తూ paraphrase యొక్క body లోనే ఇమిడి ఉండవలయును. ఒక వేళ చివరలో explanatory note రాసినట్లయితే paraphrase ని రూపొందించడంలో మీరు కొన్ని పొరపాట్లు చేసినట్లు అర్ధం వస్తుంది.)

Paraphrase చక్కగా రావడానికి ఈ క్రింది సూత్రాలు చాలా అవసరం

(a) మొదటి passage ని మీ స్వంత మాటలతో రూపొందించాలి.

(b) మొదటి paraphrase ని అదేవిధంగా paraphrase లోనికి దిగుమతి చేయరాదు.

(C) స్వతంత్ర భావాలు కలిగి ఉండవలయును.

3. The Parapharase Of Poetry

Poetry ని paraphrase చెయ్యడానికి కావలసిన special points ఇచ్చట పొందుపరచబడినవి.

Poetry కి సంబంధించి కొన్ని చిక్కులు ఉన్నవి. Poetry ఒక భాష నుండి యింకొక భాషలోనికి trans- late చెయ్యడం కష్టం. అలా చేసినపుడు మొదటి భాషలోని Poetry యొక్క charm (ఆకర్షణ) చాలా వరకు పోతుంది. అలాగే అదే భాష యొక్క prose లో translate చేసినా కూడా charm పోతుంది.

Poetry లో నున్న భావము, నడక, spirit (శక్తి) మాటల ఒరవడి ఒక మూసలో పోసి రూపొందించినట్లు ఒకదానికొకటి కలిసిపోయి ఉంటాయి. ఈ కలయిక prose లో దెబ్బతింటుంది. Poetry లోని magic అంతా ___ rhythm (ఛందోబద్ధమైన) పదములలోని గూఢమైన దాగియున్న సంగీత భావము కూడా దెబ్బతినును. ఎంతో జాగ్రత్తగా poetry ని prose గా మార్చినా కూడా poetry బాగా దెబ్బతింటుంది. అయినను, poetry ని prose లోకి మార్చడం ద్వారా composition రాయడానికి ఉపకరిస్తుంది. భాషలో verse నకు prose నకు ఉన్న తేడాలే poetry ని paraphrasing చేయడానికి ఉన్న తీవ్రమైన అడ్డంకులు.

(a) Difference in words – Difference in words wo? Poets or archaic words (ప్రాచీనమైన పదాలు) ను వాడుతారు. అవి సాధారణంగా మనకు వాడుక భాషలో ఉండవు. ఈ పదాలు మన prose లో కూడా కనిపించవు. ఉదాహరణలు – sword కు brand song కు carol,

cottage so cot, so, merchantship so argosy, before 5 ere, over so o’er, of yore s in the past, I think I ween, often oft-times, I am of opinion I trow, anything aught, about 5 anent, scold so chide, except šo save, ancestors & forefathers, per- haps perchance, belike, haply, although so albeit, girl so damsel, , lady dame, father sire, said so quoth, &, as well so withal, in addition; to boot, almost swell-nigh, Modern poets టువంటి పదాలను తగ్గిస్తున్నారు. Paraphrasing చేయునపుడు modern పదాలనే వాడాలి.

(b) Difference in the order of words. Inversions, grammatic గమనించాలి. ఒక వాక్యము యొక్క grammatical order ను మార్చినపుడు దానిని Inversion అంటారు. subject, verb, object అనే order ను poetry లో సాధారణంగా వాడుతారు.

“Mine be a cot beside a hill;”
instead of,-May a cot beside a hill be mine.
“A barking sound the shepherd hears;”
instead of-The shepherd hears a barking sound.
“Not, Celia, that I juster am
Or better than the rest;”
instead of,-Not that I am juster, etc.

(గమనిక (Note: ఒక verse కు prose formation ఇచ్చునపుడు ఈ Inversion పద్ధతిని వాడరు. Prose లో original copy లో ఉన్న పదాలను అన్నిటినీ వాడుతాము. Prose యొక్క grammatical construction ను యథాతధంగా ఉంచడానికి అక్కడక్కడా మాటలు, చేర్పులు కూడా చేయడం జరుగుతుంది. ఈ క్రింది verse ను చూడండి.

“On Linden, when the sun was low,
All bloodless lay the untrodden snow
And dark as winter was the flow
Of Iser, rolling rapidly.

పై verse అక్కడక్కడా Inversion పద్ధతి కనిపిస్తుంది. వీటిని మార్చండి. ఇప్పుడు prose sentence ఈ విధంగా వస్తుంది.
The untrodden snow lay all bloodless on Linden when the sun was low, and the flow of (the) rapidly rolling Iser was (as) dark as winter.

(c) Flowery and ornamental language. verse రాయడంలో సర్వసాధారణంగా జరుగుతుంది. దీనిని prose లో simplify చేస్తారు. ఉదాహరణకు

“Now the golden morn aloft
Waves her dew-bespangled wing,
With vermile cheek and whisper soft
She woos the tardy Spring.”

(c) Rhythm and Rhyme. ఈ పద్ధతి verse లో బాగా వాడుకలో ఉన్నది. కాని దీనికి prose లో స్థానం లేదు. కావున paraphrasing లో దీనిని వాడరాదు.

4. Special Hints (ప్రత్యేక సూచనలు)

(a) Direct and Indirect Speech. Paraphrase రెండు పద్ధతులలో ఉంటుంది. కాని indirect speech ని తప్పనిసరిగా అవసరమైతేనే వాడవలయును. సర్వసాధారణంగా direct speech నే వాడుతారు. Indian students కు indirect speech లో రాయడానికి కొన్ని ఇబ్బందులు ఉన్నవి.
fields.

(b) Metaphors. Metaphors ను similies లో రాయడం మంచిది. ఉదాహరణకు “Silently, one by one, in the infinite meadows of Heaven,
Blossomed the lovely stars, the forget-me-nots of the angels.”

దీనిని ఈ క్రింది విధంగా రాయవచ్చును.
The stars came out one by one silently in the vast sky, like forget-me-nots flowering in the

కొన్ని సందర్భాలలో, metaphor ను పూర్తిగా drop చెయ్యవచ్చును. అప్పుడు వాడుక భాషకు వాడవలయును. ఇచ్చట Keats గారు రాసిన ఒక sonnet లోని మొదటి వాక్యాన్ని చూడండి.
“Much have I travelled in the realms of gold”
పై line ను prose లో ఇలా రాస్తాము.
I have read widely in classical literature.

(c) Abstract used for concrete (దృగ్గోచరమైన దానికి ఊహాజనితమైన భావాన్ని ఇవ్వడం) Concrete భావానికి బదులుగా ఊహాజనితమైన భావాన్ని వాడినపుడు, concrete కే ప్రాధాన్యం ఇవ్వాలి. ఇచ్చట ఈ తేడాను చూడండి.
“Let not ambition mock their useful toil,”
దీనిని ఇలా రాయవచ్చు.
Ambitious men should not despise the useful labour of poor peasants.

(d) Rhetorical questions. Rhetorical questions ను direct గా అంగీకరించునట్లుగా గాని direct గా తిరస్కరించునట్లుగా గాని మార్చవచ్చును.
“Are we not better armed than our foes?”
We are better armed than our enemies;
“Is thy servant a dog that he should do this thing?”
I am not so contemptible a creature as to commit such a crime.

(e) Exclamations. (sudden గా, ఆశ్చర్యంగా మాటలు వెలిబుచ్చుట) ఈ exclamations గా ఉండవలయును. ఉదాహరణకు “O ! for a lodge in some vast wilderness!”
దీనిని ఈ విధంగా paraphrase చెయ్యవచ్చును.
I wish I had a secluded (so) refuge remote from human society.

(f) Apostrophe. Poem second person & paraphrase, plural “you” వాడడం మంచిది. Singular ‘thou’ అంత ఉపయోగకరం కాదు. ‘Thou’ అను పదాన్ని ordinary prose లో వాడరు. Verb ని second person plural భావములో వాడడం చాలా తేలిక. ఏ పద్ధతిని ఇచ్చట అవలంభించినా, చివరి వరకు, దానినే కొనసాగించడం మంచిది. వాక్యము ప్రథమ భాగంలో ‘thou’ ని వాడి చివరలో ‘you’ వాడడం చాలా తప్పు. Third person లో కూడా passage రాయవచ్చు. Mathew Arnold రాసిన Shakespere లోని మొదటి line చూడండి. “Thou art free !” We can freely criticise other authors, but Shakespeare is beyond our criticism.

5. Method Of Procedure

1. తనకు అర్ధం కాని passage ని ఎవరూ కూడా paraphrase చెయ్యలేరు. Passage నిదానంగా, శ్రద్ధగా చదవండి. దాని general meaning బాగా అర్ధమైన దాని ఒక అవగాహనకు రండి. ఒకసారి చదివితే అర్ధం కాకపోతే, రెండవసారి చదవండి. మరల మరల చదవండి. సంపూర్ణముగా అర్ధమయ్యేవరకు చదవండి. ఇది మొదటి మెట్టు మరియు చాలా ముఖ్యమైనది. ఈ stage లో ఒక చిన్న summary ని రాయండి.

2. తరువాత, వివరాలు తెలుసుకోవడానికి, passage ని మరల చదవండి. కష్టమైన పదాలను note చేసుకోండి. Grammer points ను idioms ను రాసుకోండి. passage ని మీ స్వంత మాటలలో రాయడానికి సిద్ధం కండి.

3. Passage యొక్క అన్ని హంగులూ, passage యొక్క ప్రధానాంశము ఇప్పుడు మీ అవగాహనలో ఉంటుంది. ఇప్పుడు paraphrase యొక్క rough outline మీ చేతిలో ఉంటుంది. Simple English లో paraphrase ని తయారు చేసుకొనండి. Original passage లోని అన్ని వివరాలూ వచ్చినవో లేదో ఒకసారి సరి చూసుకోండి.

4. Passage మొత్తాన్ని సంగ్రహంగా గ్రహించండి. మాట తర్వాత మాట తు. చ. తప్పకుండా para- phrase లో పెట్టవద్దు. Line వెంబడి line ను passage లో నుండి తీసి paraphrase లో అతికించవద్దు. ప్రారంభం నుండి కూడా అంతిమంలో ఏమి రాయబోవుచున్నామో మనస్సులో ఉంచండి.

5. వాక్యముల యొక్క వరుస క్రమాన్ని మీరు సరిదిద్దుకోవచ్చు. ఒక్కొక్కపుడు paragraph ని కూడా re- arrange చేసుకోవచ్చు. Meaning మాత్రం clear గా ఉండాలి.

6. పెద్ద పెద్ద వాక్యాలను చిన్నవిగా సరిదిద్దండి. అనవసరమైన చిన్న వాక్యాలు ఉంటే ఒకే పెద్ద వాక్యంగా సరిదిద్దుకోవచ్చు. ఈ విధంగా చేస్తే, అర్ధం చేసుకోవడం సులభతరం అవుతుంది.

7. కేవలం ఒక మార్పు చెయ్యాలి అనే సంకల్పములో పదములను అనవసరంగా మార్చవద్దు. ఏ word కూడా ఇంకొక word ని పూర్తిగా అధిగమించలేదు. Passage లోని చక్కని పదములను అనవసరంగా మార్చవద్దు. కేవలం పదగాంభీర్యంతో ఉన్న పదములను, పాతకాలంనాటి పదములను తీసివేసి వానికి తగిన synonym పదములను ప్రయోగించవచ్చును.

N. B. – వాడుక భాషలో సామాన్యంగా వాడుకలో నున్న పదములను తీసి వాని చోటులో కేవలం పదగాంభీర్యం ఉన్న difficult words ను వాడరాదు.
మాట వరుసకు argument అనే simple పదానికి ‘ratiocination’ అనే పదాన్ని వాడరాదు.

8. Paraphrase కు explanatory notes ను (వివరణ కోసం additional గా ఇచ్చే notes) వాడరాదు. Paraphrase యొక్క body matter లోనే అవన్నీ రావాలి.

9. Indirect speech లో ‘saying verb’ ని తప్పుగా వాడడం వలన sentence మొత్తం చెడిపోతుంది. “Verb of saying” ను పలుసార్లు repeat చేయకూడదు.
e.g.
‘The poet says that’-‘The poet further says’
The poet again remarks that’, and so on,
“Verb of saying” ను ఒకవేళ వాడదలుచుకుంటే ఒకే ఒక్కసారి వాక్యమునకు ముందు వాడుము. Tod

10. ఒక చిత్తు ప్రతిని (rough draft) తయారు చేయండి. (మీరు చాలా చిత్తు ప్రతులను తయారు చేసుకోవలసి ఉంటుంది) Revise చెయ్యండి. Original passage తో compare చెయ్యండి. ఏ detail కూడా miss అవ్వరాదు. Original passage ని కాపీ కొట్టరాదు.
Punctuation తప్పులను సరిదిద్దండి. ప్రతి idiom ఆ వాక్యానికి అందానిస్తున్నదా అని ఒకసారి ప్రశ్నించుకోండి.
– పెద్దగా ఒకసారి చదవండి. ఉచ్ఛారణలో గంభీరత ఉన్నదో లేదో పరీక్షించుకోండి.

11. ఇంత కష్టపడిన తరువాత మీ paraphrase చక్కగా కుదిరినది అని మీకు విశ్వాసం కలిగితే, final copy ని ఇప్పుడు రాయండి.

Specimens (నమూనాలు)
-1-

Breathes there the man, with soul so dead,
Who never to himself hath said,
This is my own, my native land?
Whose heart hath ne’er within him burn’d.
As home his footsteps he hath turn’d.
From wandering on a foreign strand?
If such there breathe, go, mark him well;
For him no Minstrel raptures swell;
High though his titles, proud his name,
Boundless his wealth as wish can claim;
Despite those titles, power, and pelf,
The wretch, concentred ail in self, Living,
shall forfeit fair renown,
And, doubly dying, shall go down.
To the vile dust, ffom whence he sprung.
Unwept, unhonour’d, and unsung,

-Scoff

Paraphrase

It is difficult to believe that any man can be so spiritually dead as to have no love for his native country after travelling in foreign lands. But if such an unpatriotic person does exist, take careful note of his career; and you will find that he will never inspire poets to celebrate him in deathless song. He may be a man of high rank, of noble family and of riches beyond the dreams of avarice; but these great advantages will not save him from oblivion. In spite of them all, he will win no fame during his lifetime; and when he dies he will die in a double sense. His body will return to the dust whence it came, and his name will be forgotten. None will weep for him, none will honour him, and no poet will keep his name alive in immortal poetry.

-2-

Heaven from all creatures hides the book of fate,
All but the page prescribed, their present state:
‘From brutes what men, from men what spirits know;
Or who could suffer being here below?
The lamb thy riot dooms to bleed to-day,
Had he thy reason, would he skip and play?
Pleased to the last, he crops the flow’ry food.
And licks the hand just rais’d to shed his blood y’
“Oh, blindness to the future! kindly giv’n,
That each may fill the circle mark’d by Heav’n.
Who sees with equal eyes, as God of all,
A hero perish, or a sparrow fall.

-Pope

Paraphrase

It would be impossible for us to continue living in this world if each of us knew exactly what fate had in store for him. So God in His mercy conceals (he future from all His creatures, and reveats only the present. He hides from the animals what men know, and He hides from men what the angels know. For example, if a lamb had reason like a man, it could not gambol happily, knowing it was destined to be killed for human food. But, being quite ignorant of its fate, it is happy to the last minute of its short life contentedly grazing in the flowery meadow, and even in its innocence licks the hand of the butcher who is about to slaughter it. What a blessing it is that we are ignorant of the future! God, to Whom the death of a sparrow is of equal importance with the death of a hero, has in His mercy thus limited our knowledge, so that we might fulfil our duty in the sphere to which He has appointed us.

-3-

Perseverance is the very hinge of all virtues. On looking over the world, the cause of nine- tenths of the lamentable failures which occur in men’s undertakings, and darken and degrade so much of their history, (res not in the want of talents, or the will to use them, but in the vacillating and desultory mode of using them, in flying from object to object, in staring away at each little disgust, and thus applying the force which might conquer any one difficulty to a series of difficulties, so large that no human force can conquer them. The smallest brook on earth, by continuing to run, has hollowed out for itself a considerable valley to flow in. Commend me therefore to the virtue of perseverance. Without it all the rest are little better than fairy gold, which glitters in your purse, but when taken to market proves to be slate or cinders.

-Carlyle

Paraphrase

All the virtues depend on the one virtue of perseverance. It is lack of perseverance, not lack of ability, that is the cause of most of the sad failures that stain the history of mankind. It is because men do not persevere in overcoming one difficulty at a time, that they fail. Instead of sticking to one aim in life until it is realized, they hesitate, get discouraged at every small rebuff, change from one aim to another, and so create for themselves such a series of difficulties as can never be overcome by human power. Hence they fail to accomplish anything. Even a small stream will carve out for itself a deep and wide channel simply by constantly flowing. Without perseverance, all the other virtues are like the deceitful fairy gold of the fairy-tales, which turns to worthless stones when you try to use it as money in the shops.

అభ్యాసము 164
ఈ క్రింది వానిని Paraphrase చేయుము.

1. Some murmur, when their sky is clear
And wholly bright to view,
If one small speck of dark appear

Trench

2. In their great heaven of blue :
And some with thankful love are filled,
If but one streak of light,
One ray of God’s good mercy, gild
The darkness of their night.
Lives of great men all remind us
We can make our lives sublime,
And, departing, leave behind us,
Footprints on the sands of time;
Footprints, that perhaps, another,
Sailing o’er life’s solemn main;
A forlorn, and shipwreck’d brother
Seeing, shall take heart again.

-Longfellow

3. More things are wrought by prayer
Than this world dreams of. Wherefore, let thy voice
Rise like a fountain for me night and day.
For what are men better than sheep or goats
That nourish a blind life within the brain,
If, knowing God, they lift not hands of prayer.
Both for themselves and those who call them friends!

-Tennyson

4.In such a world; so thorny, and where none
Finds happiness unblighted; or, if found,
Without some thistly sorrow at its side;
It seems the part of wisdom, and no sin
Against the law of love, to measure lots
With less dislinguish’d than ourselves, that thus
We may with patience bear our moderate ills,
And sympathize with others suffering more,

-Cowper

5. Children we are all
Of one great father, in whatever clime
Nature or chance hath cast the seeds of life-
All tongues, all colours; neither after death
Shall we be sorted into languages
And tints, white, black, and tawny,
Greek and Goth,
Northmen, and offspring of hot Africa:
The All-father, He in Whom we live and move;
He, the indifferent Judge of ail, regards
Nations, and hues, and dialects alike:
According to their works shall they be judged
When even-handed Justice in the scale
Their good and evil weighs.

-Southey

6. Beside yon straggling fence that skirts the way.
With blossom’d furze unprofitably gay,
There, in his noisy mansion, skill’d to rule,
The village master taught his little school:
A man severe he was, and stern to view,-
I knew him well, and every truant knew,

-Goldsmith

7. Well had the boding tremblers learn’d to trace
The day’s disasters in his morning face;
Full well they laugh’d with counterfeited glee,
At all his jokes,-for many a joke had he;
Full well the busy whisper, circling round.
Convey’d the-dismal tidings when he frown’d;
Yet he was kind; or if severe in aught,
The love he bore to learning was in fault.
Hark! ’tis the twanging horn. O’er yonder bridge,
That with its wearisome but needful length
Bestrides the wintry flood, in which the moon
Sees her unwrinkled face reflected bright,
He comes, the herald of a noisy world,
With spattered boots, trappped waist and frozen locks.
News from all nations lumbering at his back,
True to his charge, the close-packed load behind,
Yet careless what he brings, his one concern
Is to conduct it to the destined inn,
And, having dropped the expected bag, pass on
He whistles as he goes, light-hearted wretch,
Cold and yet cheerful messenger of grief
Perhaps to thousands and of joy to some,
To him indifferent whether grief or joy.

-Cowper

8. Be it a weakness, it deserves some praise,
We love the play-place of our early days,
The scene is touching and the heart is stone
That feels not at the sight, and feels at none;
The wall on which we tried our graving skill,
The very name we carved subsisting still,
The bench on which we sat while deep-employed.
Though mangled, hacked, and hewed, not yet destroyed;
The little ones, unbuttoned, glowing hot,
Playing our games and on the very spot;
The pleasing spectacle at once excites
Such recollection of our own delights,
That viewing it, we seem almost to obtain
Our innocent sweet simple years again.

-Cowper

9. Since trifles make the sum of human things,
And half our misery from our foibles springs;
Since life’s best joys consist in peace and ease,
And few can save or serve, but all may please;
Oh I let th’ ungentle spirit learn from hence,
A small unkindness is a great offence.
Large bounties to restore, we wish in vain,
But all may shun the guilt of giving pain.
To bless mankind with tides of flowing wealth,
With power to grace them, or to crown with health,
Our little lot denies, but heaven decrees
To all the gift of ministring ease:
The mild forbearance at another’s fault;
The taunting word, suppress’d as soon as thought;
On these Heaven bade the bliss of life depend,
And erush’d ill fortune when it made a friend.

-Hanmah More

10. Now came still Evening on, and
Twilight grey Had in her sober livery all things clad.
Silence accompanied-for beast and bird,
They to their grassy couch, those to their nests,
Were slunk-all but the wakeful nightingale ;
She all night long her amorous descant sung.
Silence was pleased. Now glow’d the firmament
With living sapphires. Hesperus, that led
The starry host, rode brightest, till the moon,
Rising in clouded majesty at length.
Apparent queen, unveil’d her peerless light,
And o’er the dark her silver mantle threw.

-Milton

11. These few precepts in thy memory
See thou character. Give thy thoughts no tongue,
Nor any unproportioned thought his act
Be thou familiar, but by no means vulgar.
Those friends thou hast, and their adoption tried,
Grapple them to thy soul with hoops of steel;
But do not dull thy palm with entertainment
Of each new-hatched, unfledged comrade.,
Beware Of entrance to a quarrel, but being in,
Bear’t that the opposed may beware of thee.
Give every man thy ear, but few thy voice,
Take each man’s censure, but reserve thy judgement.
Costly thy habit as thy purse can buy.
But not expressed in fancy; rich, not gaudy;
For the apparel often proclaims the man.
Neither a borrower nor a lender be;
For loan oft loses both itself and friend,
And borrowing dulls the edge of husbandry.

12. If misery be the effect of virtue, it ought to be reverenced; if of ill-fortune, to be pitied; and if of vice, not to be insulted; because it is, perhaps, itself a punishment adequate to the crime by which it was produced; and the humanity of that man can deserve no panegyric who is capable of reproaching a criminal in the hands of the executioner.

-Johnson

13. We are all short-sighted, and very often see but one side of a matter; our views are not extended to all that has a connection with it. From this defect I think no man is free. We see but in part, and we know but in part, and therefore it is no wonder we conclude not right from our partial views. This might instruct the proudest esteemer of his own parts how useful it is to talk and consult with others, even such as come short of him in capacity, quickness, and penetration; for since no one sees ail, and we generally have different prospects of the same thing, according to our different, as I may sav, positions to it, it is not incongruous to think, nor beneath any man to try, whether another man may not have notions of things which have escaped him, and which his reason would make use of if they came into his mind.

-Locke

14. All the performances of human art, at which we look with praise or wonder, are instances of the resistless force of perseverance; it is by this that the quarry becornes a pyramid, and that distant countries are united by canals. If a man was to compare the effect of a single stroke of a pickaxe, or of one impression of the spade, with the general design and last result, he would be overwhelmed by the sense of their disproportion; yet those petty operations, incessantly continued, in time surmount the greatest difficulties, and mountains are levelled, and oceans bounded, the slender force of human beings.

– Johnson

15. The proverbial oracles of our parsimonious ancestors have informed us that the fatal waste of fortune is by small expenses, by the profusion of sums too little singly to alarm our caution, and which we never suffer ourselves to consider together. Of the same kind is prodigality of life; he that hopes to look back hereafter with satisfaction upon past years must leam to know the present value of single minutes, and endeavour to let no particle of time fall useless to the ground. An Italian philosopher expressed in his motto that time was his estate; an estate indeed, that will produce nothing without cultivation, but will always abundantly repay the labours of industry, and satisfy the most extensive desires, if no part of it be suffered to lie waste by negligence, to be overrun by noxious plants, or laid out for show rather than

-Johnson for use.

16. Mr Hampden was a gentleman of a good extraction and a fair fortune, who from a life of great pleasure and license had on a sudden retired to extraordinary sobriety and strictness, and yet retained his usual cheerfulness and affability; which, together with the opinion of his wisdom and justice and the courage he had shewed in opposing the ship-money, raised his reputation to a very great height, not only in Buckinghamshire where he lived, but generally throughout the kingdom. He was not a man of many words, and rarely began than discourse, or made the first entrance upon any business that was assumed; but a very weighty speaker, and after he had heard a full debate, and observed how the House was like to be inclined, took up the argument, and shortly and clearly and craftily so stated it that he commonly conducted it to the conclusion he desired; and if he found he could not do that, hie was never without the dexterity to divert the debate to another time and to prevent the determining of anything in the negative which might prove inconvenient in the future.

– Clarendon

Alphabet – Vowels and Consonants: Definition & Types with Examples in Telugu

by

Alphabet – Vowels and Consonants

  1. ప్రతి భాషయు వాక్యములతో నేర్పబడును. వాక్యములు మాటలతో నేర్పబడును. మాటలు శబ్దముల (Sounds) తో నేర్పడును; శబ్దములకు వ్రాత గుర్తులు అక్షరములు.
  2.  ఇంగ్లీషు భాషకు అక్షరములు 26, వీనికి Alphabet అని పేరు. ఇవి Capitals అని Small letters అని రెండు విధములుగా వ్రాయబడును; వానిలో అచ్చు అక్షరములని, వ్రాత అక్షరములని రెండేసి రకము లుండును. 
  • CAPITALS (పెద్దవి) :
    (a) అచ్చు అక్షరములు
    ABCDEFGHIJKLM
    NOPQRSTU V W X Y Z
    (b) వ్రాత అక్షరములు :
    A B C D E F G H I J K L M
    NO P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
  •  Small letters (చిన్నవి)
    (ఎ) అచ్చు అక్షరములు :-
    abcdefghijklm
    nopqrstuvwxyz
    (b) వ్రాత అక్షరములు
    a b c d e f g h i j k l m
    n o p q r s t u v w x y z

ప్రతి వాక్యపు మొదటి మాటలోని మొదటి అక్షరము, మనుష్యుల పేర్లు. పట్టణముల పేర్లు, దేశముల పేర్లలోని మొదటి అక్షరములు ‘Capitals’ నారంభించవలెను.
3. అక్షరములు రెండు విధములు :
(a) అచ్చులు (Vowels)
(b) హల్లులు (Consonants)

Read and Learn more English Grammar Topics

  • (a) a, e, i, o, ur అను అక్షరములు గాని, వానిచే సూచించబడి వానియంతబ అవే ఉచ్చరింపబడు శబ్దములుగాని Vowels అనబడును.
    Definition:- Any of the lettersa, e, i, o, uor of the sounds (represented by them) that can be uttered without any other letters are called Vowels.
    (b) y – Usually in the middle or at the end of a Syllable * of a word, it is a vowel (as in myth, happy, my)
    (c) w: It is a vowel at the end of syllable as in new.
  •  అచ్చుల సహాయము లేనిదే తమంతట తాము ఉచ్చరింపబడనేరని తక్కిన యక్షరములు Consonants అనబడును.
    Def:- Anon-vowel letter (of the alphabet) which cannot
    be sounded without the aid of a vowel is called a Consonant.

a,e,i,o, u లు కాక తక్కన అక్షరములును, ఒక మాటకుగాని Syllable కు గాని ఆరంభమందువచ్చు w, y లుసు (e.g. Water, walk, went a way, sho-wer, అను మాటలలోని w ను; you, yard, beyond, lo-yal అను మాటలలోని yను హల్లులు (Consonants).
(Syllable) ఒక అచ్చుగా గాని ఒకే అచ్చుధ్వని నిచ్చు అచ్చుల సము దాయముగా గాని యుండవచ్చును. ఉదా: away (a-way) లో a అనునది ఒక syllable, way అనునది మరియొక Syllable, either (ei-ther) లో e, i అను రెండును కలిసి ఒక అచ్చువలె పలుకుటనే ఒక syllable అగును. their మరియొక syllable.
ఒక్క మారుగా నుచ్చరింపదగిన మాటగాని, మాటయొక్క భాగముగాని syllable అనబడును.

ఒకప్పుడు syllableలో, ఒక అచ్చుగాని ఒక అచ్చు యొక్క ధ్వని నిచ్చు అచ్చుల సముదాయముగాని, హల్లులతో కలిసి యుండవచ్చును. ఉదా:- heavy (hea-vy) లో hea ఒక syllable, vy మరియొక syllable.

Alphabet Vowels and Consonants Definition And Types with Examples In Telugu

Parts of Speech (భాషాభాగములు)

English భాషలోని మాటలన్నియు, వాక్యములో నవి చేయు పనులను బట్టి ఎనిమిది విధములుగా భాగింపబడినది. ఆ విధములకే Parts of Speech (భాషాభాగములు) అని పేరు.
Def:- Words are divided into eight kinds according to their use and these kinds are called Parts of Speech.
అవి ఏవన :-
1. Noun (నామవాచకము)
2. Verb (క్రియ)
3. Pronoun (సర్వనామము)
4.Adjective (విశేషణము)
5. Adverb (క్రియావిశేషణము)
6. Preposition (విభక్త్యర్ధ పదము)
7. Conjuction(సముచ్చయము)
8. Interjection (భావోద్రేక ప్రకటనార్ధకము)

1. The Noun (నామవాచకము)

Gopal, Krishna, John అను మాటలు ఎవరి పేర్లు ? మనుష్యుల పేర్లు. Calcutta, Madra, Bombay అను మాటలు వేని పేర్లు? పట్టణముల పేర్లు. Cow, Dog, Cat అనునవి వేని పేర్లు? జంతువుల పేర్లు. Book, Pen, Slate అను మాటలు వేని పేర్లు ? వస్తువుల పేర్లు. Crowd, rice, courage -ఇని కూడ పేర్లు అని గ్రహించనగును. ఇట్టి పేర్లు Nouns ( నామవాచకములు)అనబడును.

మనుష్యులు, జంతువులు, స్థలములు, వస్తువులు (అనగా పర్వతములు, నెలలు, వారములు, నదులు, సముద్రములు, కుర్చీలు) మొదలగువేని పేర్లయినను Nouns ( నామవాచకములు) అనబడును. ఉదా:- Gopal, Mary, Calcutta, India, Dog, Cat, Chair, Book, The Godavary, The Red Sea, The Vindhyas, January, Sunday, Flock, Milk, P
Def:- A Noun is th: name of a person, place or thing.

Ex. 1
Pick out the Nouns in the following:
ఈ క్రింది వానిలో Nouns చెప్పుము.
(a) 1. The book is on the desk.
2. The chair is in the room.
3. The pencil is on the table.
4. The bench is near the wall.
5. The boys are sitting on the bench.
6. The man has a cap on his head.
7. The duster is on the floor.
8. The bird has two wings.
9. The child has two hands.
10. There is water in the cup.
11. The lamb is eating grass.

(b) 1. Children play.
2. Birds sing.
3. The goat fell into the well.
4. Mangoes are sweet.
5. Gopal sat on the bench.
6. The peon posted the letter.
7. Calcutta is a big city.
8. The Godavari is a holy river.
9. Cats kill rats.
10. Flowers grow in the garden.
11. He put the money into his pocket.
12 Monkeys climb trees.
13. Children love their parents.
14. The tank is full of water.
15. The cow gives milk.
16. Boys and girls go to school.
17. Give me a long stick.

Ex. 2
Fill-up the blanks with Nouns
ఈ క్రింది వానిలో ఖాళీస్థలములను Nouns తో పూర్తి చేయుము :

(a) 1. The room has two- 2. The boy is in the 3.  man walks with his 4. The boy has a —- in his 5. The sits on the chair. 6. The girl is writing on the —- -7. The  –is in the box. 8. The map is on the — 9. What colour is the—-? 10. There are no —-on the tree. 11.The—– is drinking 12.—– go to school. 13. I see two birds on the —

b) 1. I hear with my —2. I see with my—-3. He thinks with his—–4. The —–shines at night. 5. The sun rises in the—-6. Fishes live in ——7.—-grow in the gardens. 8.— made all things. 9.Birds fly with their—–10. All rivers at last run into the—-11. We cross a river by a——12. The—–crows. 13.Fruits grow on ——14. The farmer ploughs his——-.

THE VERB

The Verb (క్రియ)
“The cow eats grass” “The man saw the dog” అను వాక్యములలోని eats, saw అను మాటలు ఏమి తెలియజేయును? Cow, man చేయు పనులను తెలియజేయును. ఇట్టి పనులను తెలియజేయు మాటలు Verbs (క్రియలు) అనబడును.
2. ‘This book is on the table’ అను వాక్యములో is ఏమి తెలియజేయును ? పుస్తకము యొక్క స్థితిని చెప్పును. ఇట్టి స్థితులను
తెలిజేయు మాటలు కూడ Verbs అనబడును.
3. ‘ I have a pen’ అను వాక్యములోని have ఏమి తెలియజేయును? ఒకదానిని కలిగియుండుటను తెలియజేయును. ఇట్టి మాటలు కూడ Verbs
అనబడును.
పనులను, స్థితులను కలిగియుండుటను తెలియజేయు మాటలు Verbs అనబడును. ఉదా : walk, run, is, own, belongs..
Def:- A Verb is a word which expresses “doing, being, or possessing”; as Rama walks. The penis black. Iown a house in this town.
Ex. 3. Point out the Verbs in the following :-
ఈ క్రింది వానిలోని Verbs చెప్పుము .

(a)
1. I see a ball.
2. Birds fly.
3. The boy runs.
4. Krishna brings water.
5. The sky is blue.
6. He has a pen.
7. Dogs bark.
8. Boys go to school.
9. Where are your books?
10. How many hands have you?
11. The boy is writing.
12. The girl shuts the door.
13. Weeat food.
14. Itis raining.
15. Who sits on the chair?
16. The boy comes.
17. The child plays.

(b)
1. A tiger killed the goat.
2. Stones are very heavy.
3. He went home.
4. The boys are playing.
5. We sleep at night.
6. Cows eat grass.
7. Bring some water.
8. Sit on the bench.
9. Bullocks draw carts.
10. She reads well.
11. The old man tells stories.
12. The boy is talking to his father.
13. I gave him a book.
14. The cat is very pretty.
15. He drinks water.
16. The horse runs fast..

Ex-4. Fill up the blanks with Verbs :-
ఈ క్రింది ఖాళీస్థలములను Verbs తో పూర్తి చేయుము (a) 1. The sun—–2. The dog—-3. Fire —4. Birds—– 5. The bird—–6. Children – —-7. The child—–8. Fishes——9. Dogs——–10.——the door. 11. The horse—-12.Boys——13. on the bench. 14. The cock — –15.———your books down.

(b) 1. This——- my pen. 2. He——–at the map.3. The girl—– on the slate. 4. The cow——two horns. 5. You—–a teacher. 6. The calves.—–the milk. 7. They——- writing copies. 8. They—-no caps.
9. Ia scout. 10.——-he a teacher? 11.——-they school boys?

(c) 1. I——with apen. 2. Krishna— — on the mat.3. The boy—–water.4. – —- me your book. 5. What —–your father?  6 . —–me your nose.7. Where — — your books? 8.—– your book with you. 9. How many eyes ——-you? 10. The teacher —– on the blackboard. 11. Whose books —- these ?12.—–a rupee from him. 13.—-him a rupee.

(d) 1. We must ——–every promise that we —–2. The watch —–good time . 3. The teacher ——my request. 4. We should never —–our promises. 5. I——- in an application for leave . 6. He —-for ten days leave. 7. He —— hold of a rope . 8 . They —— a trap for catching mice. 9. The bird ——-some eggs in the nest .10. I have to ——- an urgent demand this month . 11. He —–prayers to god . 12. He ——his heart to his friends. 13 Every Hindhu ——his prayers at dawn to the sun God .

Ans:- 1. keep, make 2. keeps. 3. granted 4. break 5. put 6. applied 7. caught 8. set 9. laid 10. meet 11. offers 12. opened 13. says

3. The Pronoun (సర్వనామములు)

‘Gopal bought a mango’ ‘Gopal gave the mango to Gopal’s brother’s aden’Gopal bought a mango’; ‘He gave it to his brother’ అని చెప్పుదుము. ఈ వాక్యములో he, it, his అను మాటలు వేనికి ador dat hoe? Gopal, mango, Gopal’s e-Nouns కు, బదులుగా క్రమముగా ఉపయోగింపబడినవి. ఇట్టి మాటలు pronouns , సర్వనామములు) అనబడును.
Nouns (నామవాచకములు) కు బదులుగా ఉపయోగించు మాటలు Pronouns (సర్వనామములు) అనబడును. ఉదా :-
he, they, I, may, thou, you, yours, she, it etc.
Def: A Pronoun is a word used in the place of a noun.
N.B. Pronouns help us to avoid repetition of nouns.
Ex. 5.
Name the Pronouns in:-
ఈ క్రింది వానిలోని Pronouns చెప్పుము.
1. I love my mother.
2. Your sister is very kind to me.
3. We have placed our books here and we don’t find them.
4. Rama asked his father to give him a ball.
5. Our parents told us to do their bidding.
6. My aunt took her children for a walk.
7. She is fond of them and they are fond of her.
8. My kitten is running after its mother.
9. Gopal says this slate is his, but I know it is mine.
10. He will not lend me his pen.
11. He cried out “Jesus, Thou art our Lord”.

 

Ex. 6. Name the Pronouns in these and the Nouns for which they are used:
ఈ క్రిందివానిలోని Pronouns చెప్పి అవి ఏ Nouns కు బదులుగా వచ్చెనో చెప్పుము.
1. Gopal told his brother to come to him.
2. Rama’s watch has stopped; he cannot tell the time by it.
3. School boys must obey their teacher.
4. Rama took his book and placed it on the table.
5. The boy brought some mangoes and they were very sweet.
6. The boys took their kites and went out to fly them.
7. John asked Mary to give him her pen.
8. The cow loves its calf.
9. The girl lives in her father’s house, because she is blind.
10. The father and his son went to catch the train, but they missed it. 11. When the monkey saw the woodman, it climbed a tree to get out of his way.
12. Gopal’s aunt is very fond of him, and so he goes out to see her every day.
13. Rama asked his father to give him a ball.

Ex. 7. Fill up the blanks with Pronouns :-
ఈ క్రింది ఖాళీస్థలములను Pronouns తో పూర్తి చేయుము.
a) 1.—– is a good book. 2. —- am your student. 3. is my brother. 4. are my pens. 5.– -am not a schoolboy. 6. —- –is standing. 7.- ——-have no caps on our.  heads. 8. Take the book and put– on the table. 9. Where is—— going? 10. Why are——talking to? 11. Does
—- love her mother? 12. Is this book? 13. Write— – name on the book. 14. Are —- your friends? 15. Is—- your slate?

Ans: 10. you, him 12. yours 14. they 15. this

b) 1. Seeta loved———-husband. 2. Rama loved —-  wife. 3. Gopal did not do—work and —- master punished—-
4. I have lost——pen, will you give me —-? 5. Your book is red–is green. 6. My sister took the ——-book and went to school. 7. I told —-sister to keep-books in—-box.8. The gardener plucked the flowers and put —- in a basket. 9. All sons should be obedient to—- parents. 10. The queen loves people. 11. Rama lost —- book and found in-1 –brother’s box. 12. The dog broke —- leg.

Ans:-5. mine 7. my, her, my 9. their 11. his, it, his.

Ex. 7 A.
(a) “This is my box” అను వాక్యములో my అను మాటకు బదులు mine అనుమాట నుపయోగించి “The box is mine” అని వ్రాయవచ్చును.
So my, our, your, her, their అను మాటల నుపయోగించి వాక్యములను తిరిగి వ్రాయుము.
1. That is your pen.
2. That is her box. 3. Is this my book?
4. This is their house.
5. Those are our shoes.
6. Are these your books?
7. This is her doll.
8. Is this your cap? 9. That is your slate?
10. This is my coat.
11. These are her books.
12. Those are our pencils.
(b) “That coat is yours’ అను వాక్యములోని yours అను మాటకు బదులు your అను మాటను ఉపయోగించి ‘That is your cont’ అని వ్రాయవచ్చును.
Soda mine, ours, hers, yours, theirs
ఆను వానికి బదులుగా my, our, her, your, their అనునవి ఉపయోగించి వ్రాయుము.
1. This cap is mine.
2. That pen is yours.
3. Those slates are theirs.
4. Is this book hers?
5. These pencils are yours.
6. Are these shoes yours?
7. Is this doll mine?
8. This gown is hers.
9. The garden is theirs.
10. Are those books yours?
11. This house is not ours.
12. These caps are not theirs.

4. The Adjective (విశేషణము)

 

Rama is a good boy’ ‘He saw a white horse’ అను వాక్యములలోని good, white అనుమాటలు ఏమి తెలియజేయును? రాముడెట్టి గుణముగలవాడో, గుఱ్ఱమెట్టి రంగుగలదో చెప్పుచున్నవి. ‘He gave me six mangoes,’ ‘I saw two men’ అను వాక్యములలోని six, two అనుమాటలు ఏమి తెలియజేయును? పండ్ల సంఖ్యను, మనుష్యుల సంఖ్యను చెప్పుచున్నవి. “There is much water in the pond”; “Give me some bread” అనువాక్యములలో much, some అనునవి నీరు ఎక్కువ యనియు, రొట్టె కొంత అనియు, అయా వస్తువులు పరిమితిని చెప్పుచున్నవి. ఇట్టి మాటలు Adjectives (విశేషణములు) అనబడును.
2. వస్తువుల గుణములనుగాని, పరిమితినిగాని, సంఖ్యనుగాని తెలియజేయు మాటలు Adjectives (విశేషణములు) అనబడును. ఉదా: black, small, big, short, four, little, all etc.
Def:-  An Adjective is a word which tells the kind or quantity.
Ex: a black horse, little money, two boys.
Ex8
Point out the Adjectives and the Nouns they qualify :- ఈ క్రిందివానిలోని Adjectives చెప్పి అవి ఏ nounsను qualify చేయునో చెప్పుము కా
(a) 1. This is a black pen.
2. Gopal is a good boy.
3. The sky is blue.
4. It is a red flower.
5. He has a short pencil.
6. It is a small book.
7. He has a big house.
8. The wall is white.
9. A green leaf is on the table.
10. The milk is sweet.
11. Rama is lazy.
12. I have three pencils and two pens.
13. He is the tallest boy in the class.
14. The earth is round.
15. There are twelve houses in this street.
16. This is a fat cat.

(b) 1. I saw a tall tree.
2. This bad boy struck that little girl.
3. A strong man rode on a large horse.
4. A white dog ran after a black goat.
5. He is a young man.
6. All the boys left the class.
7. The old man spoke very kindly.
8. Tell those men to go away.
9. The bat has very soft wings.
10. He carries a thin stick.
11. Rama is a clever boy.
12. This room contains ten boys.
13. There are two books in the box.
14. Give me some rice.
15. Many men do like that.

Ex. 8 A. Fill up the blanks with Adjectives :-
ఈ క్రింది వానిలోని ఖాళీస్థలములను Adjectives తో పూర్తి చేయుముః 1. Rama has a — –pen. 2. The boy wears a——coat. 3. There are
——– clouds in the sky. 4. The mangoes are —5. He has — hands. 6. The night is—– 7. There are——flowers in the basket 8. The chair has –legs. 9. He sleeps on a — bed.  10. The stone is—— 11The elephant is a –. –animal. 12. His book has a —-cover. 13. I saw an —-man.14. A  —–boy is playing in the street. 15. It is a——-house. 16. His cap is——17.I see—-flowers in the——grass. 18.
Govind is an —- — boy.

Ans: 1. costly
2. winter
3. white
4. ripe
5. long
6. dark
7. many
8. four
9. soft
10. heavy
11. huge
12. thick
13. old
14. little
15. big
16. pretty
17. yellow, green
18. idle.

Ex. 8 B

ఈ క్రింది జాబితాలలో (2) వ జాబితాలో నిNounsకు తగిన Adjectives ను (1)వ జాబితాలో నుండి ఏరి చెప్పుము.

(1) స జాబితా                      (2) వ జాబితా                          (1) స జాబితా                                             (2) ప జాబితా
1. Cold                                 Soil                                        1. Tall                                                         Walk
2. Cool                                 Street                                     2. Full                                                        Girl
3. Soft                                  Drink                                      3. Pleasant                                               dog
4. Hard                                Building                                  4. Warm                                                    lane
5. Day                                  Mind                                      5. Strong                                                   Moon
6. Narrow                             House                                   6.Hungry                                                   Clothing
7.Broad                                Breeze                                   7. kind                                                       Copy
8. Dirty                               Child                                       8. long                                                        Child
9. Large                              Weather                                 9. True                                                       Treatment
10. Little                              Bed                                      10. Sharp                                                     Constitution
11. Spacious                       Limps                                   11. Pretty                                                     Knife
12. Swift                             Water                                   12. Truthful                                                 Boy

Ex. 8. C
(a) Model Sentences: Milk is white. Life is short.
ఈ క్రింది (a) జాబితాలో Nouns కు తగిన Adjectives ను (b) జాబితాలో నుండి ఎంచి పై చూపిన వాక్యములవంటి వాక్యములను వ్రాయుము.
(a)                                                                              (b)
1. Iron                                    7. Cotton                              Green                   Cold
2. Gold                                   8. Air                                    Sweet                   Bright
3. God                                   9. Blood                                Red                      Hot
4. sugar                                 10. Silver                               Soft                      Great
5.Bread                                  11. Marble.                           Heavy                   Light
6. Grass                                   12.Silk                                 Useful                   White

1. Table 2. Dog 3. Sky 4. Ball 5. Well 6. Coat 7. Road 8. Moon 9. Pencil 10. Sun 11. Benches 12. Stones 13. Knives 14. Roses 15. Clouds.

Add suitable Adjectives to the following Nouns:- ఈ క్రింది నామవాచకములకు తగిన విశేషణములు చేర్చుము

1. Boxes 2.lions 3. day 4. house 5. fields 6. hill 7. flower 8. wheels 9. town 10. school 11. knives 12. book 13. grass 14. sky 15. room 16. street 17. sea 18. soldier 19. boy 20. friend 21. fox 22. milk 23. horse 24. mountains 25. wall 26. mistakes 27. stick 28. skin 29. stone.

Add suitable Nouns to these Adjectives :- ఈ క్రింది విశేషణములకు తగిన నామవాచకములు చేర్చుము :-
1. Hard 2. pretty 3. new 4. yellow 5. great 6. learned 7. brave 8. big 9. clever 10. good 11. large 12. red 13. blue. 14. green 15. white 16.black 17. dear 18. these 19. round 20. sweet 21. sharp 22. heavy 23. high 24. bright 25. cunning 26. five 27.some 28. young 29. bold 30.idle 31. old 32. short 33. small. 34. many 35. bad 36. true 37. kind 38. dark 39. deep 40. long 41.broad 42.second 43. fourth.

5. The Adverb(క్రియావిశేషణము)

“The boy spoke loudly” అను వాక్యములోని loudly అను మాట ఏమి తెలియజేయుచున్నది? పిల్లవాడు ఎట్లు మాట్లాడెనో చెప్పుచున్నది; కనుక !oudly అనుమాట spoke అను Verb యొక్క అర్ధమును విశేషించుచున్నది.
2. “Rama is a very good boy” అను వాక్యములోని very అను మాట ఏమి తెలియజేయుచున్నది? రాముడు ఎంతమంచివాడో చెప్పుచున్నది. కాబట్టి very అను మాట good అను adjective యొక్క అర్ధమును విశేషించుచున్నది. “The man walks very slowly” అను వాక్యములోని very అను మాట ఏమి తెలియజేయుచున్నది ? ఆ మనుష్యుడు ఎంత నెమ్మదిగా నడుచుచున్నాడో తెలియజేయుచున్నది. కాబట్టి very అను మాట slowly అను adverb యొక్క అర్ధమును విశేషించుచున్నది. ఇట్టి మాటలు
Adverbs అనబడును.
క్రియలు తెలియజేయుపనులు ఏ విధంగా జరుగునో, ఎక్కడ జరుగునో, ఎప్పుడు జరుగునో, ఎంతవరకు జరుగునో, మొదలగు విషయములను తెలియజేయు మాటలు విశేషణముల పరిమితిని, ఇతర క్రియావిశేషణముల పరిమితిని, (degree) తెలియజేయు మాటలు, Adverbs (క్రియా విశేషణములు) అనబడును. ఉ: loudly, fast, quickly, here, there, now, then, to- day, to-morrow, yesterday, quite, very, not etc.

Def:- An Adverb is a word which qualifies (or adds to the meaning of) a verb, an adjective or another adverb.

Point out the Adverbs and the words they modify in:-

1. He sat down quickly.
2. You sat there.
3. He is sleeping now.
4. He writes quickly.
5. The horse runs fast.
6. This horse is very black.
7. They came to see me yesterday.
8. I told him then.
9. The girl sings sweetly.
10. The boy writes well.
11. He will come tomorrow.
12. He is coming here to-day.
13. He never speaks to me.
14. The fox jumped again.
15. He always tells lies.
16. They will walk back tomorrow.
17: Once there was a king.
18. The boy went away to his house.
19. The boy walks slowly up.
20. He tried once.
21. He is quite right.
22. He will always try to be good.

Fill up the blanks with Adverbs:-
ఈ క్రింది వాక్యములోని ఖాళీస్థలములను Adverbs తో పూర్తిచేయుము :-
1. The horse runs ————–2. I want to sit ——-3. I am —
——weak. 4. He sat down— 5. The boy is crying  —-6. The man speaks ——loudly. 7. Will you come —-? 8. He will – — come back. 9. The teacher spoke to me very—– 10. He wrote the letter – 11. He will go to Madras— 12. The cow walks—–13. Rama loves his son—14. The boy went—— 15. I met him —-16. He gets up—-17.——–tell lies. 18. There was—– a king. 19. The sun shines—–

Ans: 1. fast 2. down 3. very 4. suddenly 5. aloud 6. very 7. soon 8. surely 9. kindly 10. yesterday 11. to-morrow 12. slowly 13. deeply 14. home 15. unexpectedly 16. early 17. never 18. once 19. brightly.

Ex. 11 B.
Fill up the blanks with suitable Adjectives or Adverbs :-

—
1. He broke — –the door. 2. The horse broke —- and ran away.   3. He kept to his studies. 4. A post has fallen —-in your office. 5. I felt at the time of the examination. 6. I was taken—soon after I came home. 7. The lion was set —–8. He made —the loss. 9. We ran —- of funds. 10. Your argument does not hold —-. 11. He was tried and found 12. He struck the man—-

Ans: 1. open 2. loose 3. close 4. vacant 5. tired 6. ill 7. free 8. good 9. short 10. water 11. guilty or wanting 12. dead or down.

6. The Preposition(విభక్త్యర్థపదములు)

“The book is on the table” అను వాక్యములో on అను మాట యేయే వస్తువులకు గల సంబంధమును (అనగా పైన క్రింద, ప్రక్కన, etc.)
తెలియజేయును? table అను noun నకు book అను noun నకు గల సంబంధమును తెలియజేయును.
“He is kind to me” అను వాక్యములో to అను మాట me అను pronoun నకు kind అను adjective నకు గల సంబంధమును తెలియజేయును. I swim in the river అను వాక్యములో in అను మాట, river అను noun నకు swim అను verb నకు గల సంబంధమును తెలియజేయును.
ఒక noun నకు లేక pronoun నకు మరియొక మాటకును గల సంబంధమును తెలియజేయు మాటలు Prepositions (విభక్త్యర్థపదములు) a. with, by, for, from, of, in, on, at, upon, to etc. Def:- A Preposition is a word which shows the relation between a noun or pronoun, and some other word.
A preposition is said to govern the noun or pronoun that comes after it. The noun or pronoun is said to be the object of the prepostion.

తెలుగు భాషలో విభక్తి ప్రత్యయములు చాలా భాగము Prepositions వలె పనిచేయును.
“In the book”=’5”
ఇంగ్లీషు భాషలో preposition (in) నామవాచకమునకు గాని సర్వనామమునకుగాని పూర్వము వచ్చును. తెలుగు భాషలో విభక్తి ప్రత్యయము వానికి తరువాత వచ్చును.
Point out Preposition in :-
Ex. 12
ఈ క్రింది వానిలో Prepositions చెప్పుము.
1. He rides on a horse. 2. The book is on the desk. 3. The box is in the room. 4. I am going from Bombay to Madras. 5. He fell into the well. 6. I saw him at the gate. 7. He beat the dog with a stick. 8. The lesson is about the tiger. 9. Here is a present for you. 10. The sun gives us light during the day. 11. He spoke to the elephant. 12. The elephant is between the two horses. 13. He stood by the door. 14. I am loved by him. 15. He went through the wood. 16. The box is under the table. 17. The leg of the dog is broken. 18. The boys go home after school. 19. The bench is near the wall. 20. The boy stood before the teacher. 21. There is a horse behind the elephant. 22. There are many pupils in the school. 23. The children played with him. 24. I saw him during the battle. 25. Look at the sky. Ex. 12 A
Fill in the blanks with Prepositions :-
ఈ క్రింది వానిలో ఖాళీస్థలములను Prepositions తో పూరిరేయుము :-
3. The boy is the class. 4. The mat is
see
1. The map is— the wall. 2. There is water —- the tank. the floor. 5. We our eyes. 6. The chair is -the wall. 7. Chairs are wood. 8. The girl goes–school. 9. The child plays — a ball. 10. The boy came—the room. 11. He took a pen—the box. 12. I sold the book-sixty paise. 13. He has a cap his head. 14. He smells —- his nose. 15. He put the piece of bread —- his mouth. 16. He has a cap—- his hand. 17. The teacher sat —- the two boys. 18. There is water — the bridge.

1. The Conjunction (adj)

‘Ram and Gopal are brothers’ and అనుమాట వేనిని కలుపుచున్నది? Ram, Gopal అను నామవాచకములను కలుపుచున్నది. ‘Hecan readand write’ అను వాక్యములో and అను మాట వేనిని కలుపుచున్నది? ‘He can read; He can write’ అను వాక్యములను కలుపుచున్నది. ‘I want penor pencil’ అను వాక్యములో or అనునది వేనిని So? ‘I want a pen, I want a pencil’ e కలుపుచున్నది. ఇట్టి మాటలు Conjunctions (సముచ్చయములు) అనబడును. వాక్యములను గాని, మాటలనుగాని కలుపు మాటలు Conjunctions (5v5jobáva) ca.: and, but, or, because, therefore, as, until, unless, although etc.
Def: A Conjunction is a word used merely to join together words or sentences.
Ex. 13. Point out the Conjunctions in:
ఈ క్రింది వానిలోని Conjunctions చెప్పుము.
(a) 1. Govind and Krishna are good boys. 2. He is very clever but lazy. 3. The boy is good and clever. 4. Give me a pen or a pencil. 5. The boy can only read but cannot write. 6. The cow and the calf will be sold. 7. You must stay there or go. 8. The man is poor but very honest. 10. He or his brother has done it. 11. The boy is lazy or dull. The following exercise and Ex. 13.B. may be taken up after Chapter IX is finished.
9. The horse is lost or stolen.
(b) 1. Rama and Gopal are brothers. 2. The man is tall and handsome. 3. The man is happy, though he is poor. 4. I think that you must go. 5. Do not go out, unless it is finished. 6. Be silent, while I am talking. 7. I will wait, till you are ready. 8. You cannot go out, as it is raining. 9. His father believed him, because he always speaks the truth. 10. The man is rich, but very mean. 11. Neither Ram nor Gopal came to school to-day. 12. He struck both me and my brother. 13. Tell me if you broke the window. 14. Do not throw stones, lest you should hurt someone. 15. He is either deaf or dumb.
Ex. 13 A. Split up each of the sentences in Ex. 13 (a) into separate
sentences.
Ex. 13 (a)లోని ప్రతివాక్యమును రెండేసి వాక్యముల క్రింద విడదీయుము. Ex. 13. B. (a) Fill in the blanks with suitable Conjuctions:
—
ఈ క్రింది వానిలో ఖాళీస్థలములను తగిన Conjunctions తో పూర్తి చేయుము. 1. He sang —-she danced. 2. Rama is strong — -he is a coward. 3. Krishna —- I were in Tuni then. 4. I like sugar – my sister does not. 5. the sun is hot now, I shall not go out. 6. the teacher entered the class, the pupils got up. 7. You can have coffee tea. 8. Portia is—beautiful— -good. 9. You will pass —- you work hard. 10. You cannot pass you work hard. 11. You must help me —- I cannot join the college. 12. Two-Two make four. 13. Govind has stolen-Rama has stolen. 14. The crops failed —- there were no rains. 15. They went on playing —-it became dark. 16. The train had left —- I went to the station. 17. He was not only clever humble. 18. The train started – I reached the station. 19. come in–go home.
Ans: 2.but 5. as 6. when 7. or 8. both 9. if 10. unless 11. otherwise 13. or 14. because 15. till 16. when 17. but 18. before 19. either, or.

b) Rewrite the following as correct sentences supplying suitable Conjunctions wherever necessary

అవసరమైనచోట తగిన Conjunctions ఉపయోగించుచు ఈ క్రింది వానిని సరియైన వాక్యములుగా తిరిగి వ్రాయుము.
1. I want paper pen.
2. Give me a pen a pencil.
3. Take your book read.
4. Govind Krishna are good friends.
5. I know him I do not like him.
6. The cow the calf are in the field.
7. The boy is good dull.
8. The cow the calf is in the field.
9. The boy may stay here go home.
10. Go see where he is.
11. You may go home sleep.
12. Govind, Krishna has done this.
13. He is rich happy.
14. He will come telephone?
15. You lied your parent.
16. Asleep awake, night day he is worried.

Ans:- 1. and 2.or 5. but 7.but 8. or 9. or 12. or 14. either, or 15. Either you lied or your parent. 16. or, or
Ex. 13 C.
Combine the following with suitable Conjunctions:- ఈ క్రింది వానిని తగిన Conjunctions తో కలుపుము.
1. The boy can read. The boy can write.
2. The book is on the desk. The slate is on the desk.
3. Sita is a good girl. Savithri is a good girl.
4. The man is deaf. The man is dumb.
5. The boy is clever. The boy is careless.
6. I met Rama. I met Krishna.
7. He did the work quickly. He did the work neatly.
8. He has stolen the letter. His brother has stolen the letter.
9. I cannot lift the stone. It is very heavy.
10. I will give you the book. I will give you its price.
11. The boy is young. The boy is very strong.
12. Will you have tea? Will you have coffee?
13. The boy is clever. The boy is industrious.
14. I must find the book. I must buy another.
15. The boy is going to school. The girl is going to school.
16. The boy is in the room. His father is in the room.
17. I must sleep. I am tired.
18. To risk a battle is the problem. Not to risk a battle is the problem.

Ans:- 1. The boy can read and write. 2. The book and the slate are on the desk. 3. Sita and Savithri are good girls. 4. The man is deaf and dumb. 5. The boy is clever, but careless. 8. He or his brother has stolen the letter. 9. because 10. the book
or its price. 12. tea or coffee. 14. or 16. The boy or his father is in the room. (The boy and his father are in the room) 18.or.

8. The Interjection, భావోద్రేక ప్రకటనార్ధకము)

హఠాత్తుగా మనసులో కలుగు సంతోషమునుగాని, ఆశ్చర్యమునుగాని, విచారమునుగాని, భీతినిగాని తెలియజేయు మాటలు Interjections (భావోద్రేక ప్రకటనార్థములు) అనబడును. ఉ: Ah! Oh! Alas! Hurrah! Ho! etc. Def: An Interjection is a word which expresses some sudden and strong feeling such as joy, surprise, sorrow, fear etc..
The Article
A, an, the : ఈ మూడు మాటలు Adjectives లో చేరినవయినను వీనికి Articles అని ప్రత్యేకముగా పేరు ఈయబడినది.
Use of the Articles-a and an
వీనిని one లేక army అను అర్ధమునందు ఉపయోగింతురు. There is a book on the table. (=one). How many sides has a triangle ? (=any).
(2) అచ్చు యొక్క ధ్వనితో ప్రారంభించు మాటల ముందు an ఉపయోగింపబడును. ఉ: an ox, an ant, an hour, an heir. An is used before words beginning with a vowel sound.
(3) హల్లులు యొక్క ధ్వనితో నారంభించు మాటలముందు a వచ్చును. ఉ: a boy, a cat, a house, a year, a young man. A is used before words beginning with a consonant
sound.

Note : 1 మాటకు మొదట వచ్చిన
(a) U అనుదానికి “యు” కారోచ్చారణ ఉన్నపుడును
(b) O అనుదానికి “ప” కారోచ్చారణ ఉన్నపుడును అవి హల్లులగును. ఉ:
(c) a unit, a useful book, a European, a University,
(d) a one rupee note, such a one. Jesh alimum of Note: 2. Silent ‘h’ 35s an 403383. &: an hour, an honour, an heir.
Ex. 14. Put a or an before the following.

1. house 2. ox 3. man 4. cow 5. egg 6. tree 7. ass 8. fox 9. elephant 10. orange 11. mango 12. axe 13. box 14. old man 15. island 16. goat 17. one 18. unit 19. hour 20. honour 21. history 22. historical 23. owl 24. eagle 25. horse 26. ant 27.boy 28. eye 29. order 30. iron 31. frog 32. owner 33. goose 34. umpire 35. book 36. uproar 37. urgent business 38. uneven ground 39. European 40. Umbrella 41. useful servant 42. hotel.

Ans: an for 15, 19, 20, 23, 32, 34, 36 to 38, 40
a for 16, 17, 18, 21, 22, 39, 41, 42.

Use of Capitals: 1. Jars, 2. Poetry 6 ప్రతి line మొదటిమాట, 3. మనుష్యుల పేర్లు. 4. దేశముల పేర్లు, 5. పట్టణముల పేర్లు, 6. వారముల పేర్లు, 7. నెలల పేర్లు, 8. నదుల పేర్లు, 10. పర్వతముల పేర్లు, 11. I, God అను మాటలు, 12. God ను సూచించు (a) rouns (Almighty, Lord), (b) pronouns (Thou, He), 13. 5
వాక్యపు మొదటి మాట Capitals తో నారంభింపవలెను.
Ex 15. Put Capitals where they are required:
(a) Once i went to calcutta, there i bathed in the river ganges. one sunday in the month of february i went to see a friend. he was not at home he went to the church to offer his prayers to god. my friend asked me,” why did you not come to the station?” i said “my father stopped me to look to some urgent business.” gopal and krishna are very close friends. they will leave madras for bombay next monday. rama re- turned last week from england. the indian ocean lies to the south of india the himalayas are the highest mountains in the
world.
(b)a hungry spider made a web of threads so very fine

your tiny fingers scare could feel the slender little line. Subject and Predicate

Subject                                  Predicate
He                                          laughed
Cats                                        catch mice
I                                              ask you this question
Rama                                      was rich
The table                                 is made of wood.

పైవిధముగా వాక్యములను రెండు భాగముల క్రింద విభజింప వచ్చును. ఒక భాగము Noun గాని Pronounగాని అయియుండును. దానిని గురించియే – ఆ వాక్యము చెప్పును. దానినే Subject అందురు.
రెండవ భాగము ఆ Subject ను గురించి చెప్పును. దానినే Predicate అందురు. కాబట్టి Subject గురించి చెప్పునది అంతయు Predicate
అనబడును.
Def: The Subject of a sentence is noun or noun equiva- lent about which something is said.
Def: The Predicate is all that tells about the subject. Predicate లో ముఖ్య భాగమును Verb అందురు. ఉ: laughed, catch, was, ask, is made.
Def: The essential part of the predicate is the verb. Subject, Verb, and Object కర్త. క్రియ, కర్మ,
“Rama killed a tiger” ఈ వాక్యములో చంపుటయను పని జరిగినది. ఈ పనిని ఎవరు చేసిరి? రాముడు చేసెను. ఏమి చేసెను? చంపుట యను పనిని చేసెను. దీని ఫలమేది పొందినది? పులి పొందినది. కాబట్టి వాక్యమందు సాధారణముగా మూడు భాగములుండును.
1. ఒక పనిని చేయువాడు 2. వాడు చేయు పని 3. ఆ పనియొక్క ఫలమనుభవించువాడు.
1. పనిని చేయువానిని తెలుపుమాట Subject(కర్త).
(“కర్త” అను పదమునకు సరియైన ఇంగ్లీషు మాట “Doer or Agent” కాని ‘కర్త’ “Subject” అనునవి పర్యాయపదములుగా వాడబడుచున్నవి. మనుష్యులను మాత్రమే గాక సమస్త ప్రాణికోటిని, ప్రాణములేని వానిని తెలిపెడు మాటలు కూడ Subject గా నుండవచ్చును.)
2. వాడు చేయుపనిని తెలుపుమాట Verb ( క్రియ).
3. వాడు చేసిన పని యొక్క ఫలమును పొందు వానిని తెలియజేయు మాట Object(కర్మ).
Subject(కర్త) యును Verb (క్రియ) యును లేకుండ వాక్యమేర్పడదు. Object (కర్మ) ఒకప్పుడుండును, ఒకప్పుడుండదు. ఇది (క్రియ)ను బట్టి
యుండును.
ఉ :1. “Rama came” అను వాక్యములో Rama అనునది Subject(కర్త). camme అనునది Verb (క్రియ), ఇచట Object (కర్మ) లేదు. 2. “The cow gives milk” అను వాక్యములో cow అనునది Subject(కర్త), gives అనునది Verb (క్రియ), milk అనునది Object (కర్మ).
N.B. – యీ దిగువ మాదిరి వాక్యములలో subject లోపించును. ఉ
‘ sit down’; ‘come here’; అనగా (you) sit down; (You) come here గనుక యీ రెండు వాక్యములలో you అను Subject లోపించినది.

How to find out Subject, Verb and Object

కర్మను కనిపెట్టు విధము
మొదట వాక్యములోని Verb (క్రియ)ను కనిపెట్టవలెను. ఇది సులభము. ఏలన Verb(క్రియ) ఎల్లప్పుడు ఒక పనిని తెలియజేయుమాట అయియుండును. Verb నకు వెనుక ఎవడు, ఎవరు, ఏది, ఏవి అనుమాటలలో నొకదానిని ఉంచి ప్రశ్నవేయగా వచ్చుజవాబే Subject (కర్త) అగును. ఆ Verb నకు వెనుక ఎవనిని, ఎవరిని, దేనిని, వేనిని, అను మాటలలో నేదో యొకదానిని ఉంచి ప్రశ్నవేయగా వచ్చు జవాబు Object(కర్మ) అగును. ఒకప్పుడు Verb నకు twoobjects రెండు కర్మలు) ఉండును. ఉ:- ‘Rama gave me a book’ ఇక్కడ me, book అను Objects (50)
N.B :- వాక్యరచనలో ఇంగ్లీషు భాషకును, తెలుగు భాషకును గల భేదము: ఇంగ్లీషు భాషలో సాధారణముగా మొదట Subject, తర్వాత Verb, తర్వాత Object (S.V.O.) వచ్చును. తెలుగుభాషలో సాధారణముగా మొదట Sub- ject, తరువాతObject, తరువాత Verb వచ్చును. (S.O.V.)
ఉ: Rama killed the tiger రాముడు పులిని చంపెను.
Ex. 16: Break up the following sentences into Subject and Predicate.
1. Gopal had a friend. 2. He met his friend in the hotel. 3. We gave him five rupees. 4. Once there lived a king. 5. Wl.cre were you last year? 6. After six months he came back. 7. He asked Krishna for his book. 8. Why did you fail in the exami- nation? 9. Give me back my pen. 10. Have you any money with you? 11. How many legs have you? 12. How many boys are there in this class? 13. When did he die? 14. Whom do you punish?
Ex. 16. A. Pick out the Verbs in Ex. 16.
Ex. 17. Pick out the Subjects in:-
1. The pen is black. 2. They have books in their hands. 3. Why did you fail in the examination? 4. Where do you go now? 5. Here are two boys. 6. Whose help do you take? 7. The cow is eating grass. 8. There are two pencils on the desk. 9. Give me your book. 10. Where is your book? 11. Show me your hand. 12 Where is your book? 13. Are these your pens? 14. Have you a cap? 15. Who broke the slate? 16. Whose book is
this?
(b) 1. Good boys do not lose their books. 2. Are there many boys in your school? 3. Have they seen a tiger? 4. How many books have they? 5. Whom did you see? 6. What does the man want?

Ex. 18. Pick out the Objects in:-

  1.  The boy learns his lesson.
  2.  I saw the tiger.
  3.  I put my pen on the desk.
  4.  My father broke his stick.
  5.  You did not bring many books.
  6.  He often caught a lot of fish.
  7. He threw his net into the water.
  8.  He found no fish in it.
  9. What do you want?
  10. Whom do you appoint?
  11.  Whose book did you buy?

Ex. 19. Pick out the Subject, Verb, and Object in:-

  1. I heard a loud noise.
  2.  The boys showed him their copybooks.
  3.  Do not punish him.
  4.  Show me your book.
  5.  I will tell you a story tomorrow.
  6.  Sometimes we lose our books.
  7.  There are four men in the room.
  8.  Why did you leave the class?
  9.  Please give me your pen.
  10.  Did you not see him?
  11.  Take up your books.
  12.  Have you seen a camel?
  13.  Where do you get salt water?
  14.  Can you get some water?
  15.  Do you see my hand?
  16.  Get me some sugar.
  17.  Here are five pencils.
  18.  What are you doing?
  19.  Which of these fruits do you not like?
  20.  What do you want?
  21.  How does he do the work?
  22.  Has nothing been done?
  23.  Do not run away.
  24.  What did he do?
  25.  My father sent me a watch.
  26.  Gopal told me a story.
  27.  What is your name?

Analysis : Definition & Types with Examples in Telugu

by

Analysis

Def: A Sentence is a group of words which makes complete sense.
Analysis అనగా వాక్యములను (sentence) అవి యే యే భాగములు గూడి అయినవో వానిని అట్టి భాగముల క్రింద విడదీయుట.

The chief parts of a sentence are the subject and the Predicate. If the Verb is transitive, there is also an object. A sentence may contain only one subject and one predi- cate; or more subjects than one and more predicates than one.

Def: A sentense which contains only one subject and one predicate is called a Simple sentence as :

1. Birds fly.
2. I brought a book.

Analysis Definition And Types with Examples In Telugu

Def: A Clause is a group of words, forming part of a sentence and having a subject and a predicate of its own as: In ‘I cannot sya whenhe went away’ there are two clauses: 1. 1 cannot say. 2. When he went away.
A sentence which contains more than one subject and more than one predicate may be either Complex or compound.

Def: A sentence which contains one principal clause and one or more subordinate clauses is called a Complex sentence as : 1. It is not known who has done this. 2. I think he destroyed the letter which you sent him.

Read and Learn more English Grammar Topics

N.B: For ‘Principal and Subordinate’ clauses; see Chapter IX.

Def: A sentence which contains at least, two principal clauses is called a Compound sentence; as: Birds fly and fishes swim.

N.B: A compound sentence may also contain subordinate clauses depending upon the principal clause; as:- The teacher asked the boy why he was crying, but he gave no answer.

SUBJECT                                                                                               PREDICATE
No.SubjectAttributive

Adjuncts

Verbcomple

ment

objectAttributive

Adjuncts

Adverbial Adjuncts
1Fox(a) a(b)    hungrysawgrapesa) some b) fine c) hanging
upon a wall		once
2Man(a) a (b) em
ployed for
the purpose		foundstealing
a watch		thiefthe
3Boy(a)a(b) small (c) aged eightwas

bringing

water(a)    one hot summer day.

(b)    from a river.

4Ramathe son of
Dasartha		killeddemons(a) any(b)    cruela) in the forest (b) with the
greatest ease.
5Ramathe exilemadeKing of
Lanka		Vibhish-

ana

a) after Ravana’s death, b) amidst great rejoicings.
6LearThe King of
Britain		bacamcmadat the ingratitude of his
daughters.
7Fathermytaught(a)sons(b)    science(a) all, his
(b) physical		with much success
8Alexanderthe King of
Macedonia		was sur-
named		theGreatafter his conquest of the Persian Empire.

 

Simple Sentences are of five kinds :

1. An Asser. sentence simply affirms or denies some- thing (a) An Affirmative sentence states a fact: God made the world. (b) A Negative sentence denies or says ‘no’ : He did not go.
2. An Interrogative sentence asks a question: Did God make the world?
3. An Imperative sentence gives an order: Come here. Go there.
4. An Optative sentence states a wish or prayer : God save the king.
5. An Exclamatory sentence expresses a strong feeling (as an interjection does: How great God is!

The chief parts of a Simple sentence are the subject, the verb and the object. The subject or the object is always a noun or a noun equivalent. We may add the meaning of a noun (i.e. we may enlarge its meaning) by an Adjective (or an Adjective equivalent.) In analysis we call this, Enlargement of the subject or of the Object. This is also called an Adjectival adjunct or Attribute.

The essential part of the predicate is the verb. We may add to the meaning of a verb by an adverb (oranadverb equivalent) which extends its meaning. This in analysis, we call the extension of the verb; this is also called anAdverbial adjunct. Note: A verb of incomplete predication requires a complement.

Thus we have Seven parts in a sentence:
The subject and its enlargements (Attributes)
The object and its enlargements (attributes)
The verb, its complement and its extensions (adjuncts)

Let us analyse the sentence:

The good king loved his country dearly.

(1) Subject king
(2) Enlargements of the subject – the good
(3) Verb: loved
(4) Extension of the verb: dearly.
(5) Object: country
(6) Enlargement of the object : his

Examples of Analysis

(Answers are given in a tabular form on page 210)

1. Once a hungry fox saw some fine grapes hanging upon a wall.
2. A man employed for the purpose found the thief stealing awatch.
3. One hot summer day a small boy aged eight was bringing water from a river.
4. Rama, the son of Dasaratha, killed many cruel demons in the forest with the greatest ease.
5. Rama, the exile, made Vibhishana, King of Lanka after Ravana’s death, amidst great rejoicings.
6. Lear, King of Britain, became mad at the ingratitude of his daughters.
7. My father taught all his sons Physical Science with much success.
8. Alexander, the King of Macedonia, was surnamed the Great, after his conquest of the Persian Empire.

Ex. 40 B

Analyse the following Simple Sentences:

1. A tall fisherman once caught a small fish.
2. The people of Arabia often cross the sandy deserts.
3. The last straw breaks the camel’s back.
4. Your tiny fingers scarce could feel the slender little line.
5. The hungry spider carefully watched the happy little flies.
6. The little flies saw there the pretty shining web.
7. All the flies flapped their little wings.
8. Theold teacher punished the wicked boy very severely.
9. Once upon a time a certain jackal chased a ewe-sheep.
10. Once a little black ant found a large grain of wheat.
11. In Arabia much of the land is desert.
12. In the Indian village was a cart drawn by two bullocks.
13. On the otherside of the bridge a cart drawn by four horses has stopped.
14. What did you say? 15. Where have you seen him?
16. Rama was presented with a watch by his father.
17. There is no use in crying over a broken jar.
18. Krishna, the monitor of the ninth class was severely punished by his class teacher.
19. Into the valley marched slowly the whole army before night-fall.
20. The good alone are happy. Complex sentence To analyse Complex sentence we should study the na- ture of clauses.

Subordinate Clauses

There are three kinds of subordinate clauses: (1) the Noun clause, (2) the Adjective clause, and (3) the Adverb clause. (1) A Noun clause does the work of a Noun. (b) An Adjective clause does the work of an Adjective. (c) An Adverb clause does the work of an Adverb.

Noun Clauses

A Noun clause does the work of a Noun, so like a noun it may be:-

(1) (a) The object of a transitive verb:

1. We know that he is a good boy.
2. Tell me if you can spare time.
3. No one knows whether he is alive.
4. Ask him when he wrote the letter.
5. We could not tell whence the noise arose.
6. Do you know where he  The Subordinate clause is printed in italics; the word or words to which it is grammatically related are printed in thick. lives?
7. She asked him why he was weeping.
8. The king asked him how old he was.
9. We cannot say who wrote the letter.
10. Find out which of the boys broke the bench.
11.I ask that I may be given time.
12. I do not know whom I am to punish.
13. I do not know whose pen is lost.
14. Take whatever you like.
15. Take whatever steps you like.
16. I asked him what he was doing.
17. I wish to know what he was doing.
18. Tell me what you have brought.

Note (1) In the sentence 16 above, we may supply the words, “the question”, before’ what’ (e.g. – asked him (the question) what he was doing) In the sentences 17 and 18 above, we may supply the words, “the answer to the question.” before what 17: Tell me (the answer to the question), What you have brought.

In these two sentences (16, 17, 18) the what – clauses) are dependent questions, what being an interrogative pronoun. So, if the words, “the question,” may be supplied before a what – clause depending upon a verb of asking; or the words the answer, to the question before the what-clause depending upon a verb of knowing or telling, the what – clause is a noun clause.

Note-(2) See that he finishes the work soon. Take care (=see) that he does not run away with the money.

Mind (=take care) that you are not caught. Jšávo 5*5 noun caluse e ‘see’ ‘take care’ ‘mind’ esas objecte.
(b) The retained Object of a Transitive verb :- I was taught that learning is good.
(c) The Object of a Infinitive:- He asked me to say what I wanted.
(d) The Object of a Participle:- Knowing that he was a fool, I did not talk to him at all.

(e) The Object of a Gerund: We all ran to the tent on hearing that it caught fire.
(1) The Object of the Transitive meaning in the Noun: 1. There is a hope that he may recover (=It is hoped that he may recover).
2. I have suspicion that he is not honest (=1. suspect that he is not honest).
3. There is a clear proof that he stole the purse. (=1 it is clearly proved that he stole the purse).
N.B. Other nouns used in this way are belief, doubt,fear.

(g) The object of the Transitive meaning in the combi- nation (to be + adjective):
1. The captain was afraid that he could not save the ship (feared)
2. I am desirous that you should succeed (=desire)
3. I am hopeful that I shall succeed (=hope)
4. I am certain (or sure) that he is a rogue (=know).

Note In the following sentences, the that clauses coming after the same combination (to be +adjective) had better be construed as noun clauses used adverbially to the adjectives –
1. I am glad that you have passed the examination.
2. The teacher is angry that you are not attentive in the class.
3. I am sorry that he failed in his attempt.
(h) In the following sentences the that clauses are to be construed as noun clauses used adverbially to past participle –
1. Rest assured that you will be given promotion.
2. She is annoyed that you are going away.
3. The people were disgusted that Caesar should make a triumph over another Roman.
4. I was grieved that you were unnecessarily punished
5. I was surprised that he failed in the examination.
6.1 was rejoiced that you had won the suit.
7. Cursed be 1, that I did so.
8. The boy was pleased that he had won a prize.

(1) In the following sentences the that – clauses are to be construed as Noun clauses used adverbially to verbs.
1. Do not The verb to be with an adjective is similar in meaning to a trnasitive verb.” laugh at me that I say so.
2. I rejoice that you are left off without any punishment.
3. I warned him that a repetition of the mistake would cost him his job.
5. I cursed him that his whole family would perish before long.
6. Igrieved that you should be so angry.
7. I will never consent,. not that your offer is a bad one but because I do not trust you.

(2) The Object of a Preposition
1. It is plain from what you have said.
2. There is no sense in what you spoke.
3. I have no idea of what you are going to do.
4. Go whenever you like except that you must not go in the rain.
5. He daily takes batavias except when they are not available.
6. Do not depend upon what he says.

(3) The Subject of a verb-
1. That he is a good boy is well known.
2. What he said was false.
3. When he goes here is not known.
4. How this happened has to be found out.
5. Why he failed is quite clear.
6. Whether the child will recover is still doubtful.
7. Where Rama was born is unknown.
8. Who broke the slate could not be found out.
9. Which way the boy went not observed.
10. Whatever I have is yours.

Note: A noun clause may be used as a Nominative Absolute; as :-
That he took the money having been proved, it rests with him to show that he did not take it with a dishonest motive.

(4) (a) The Subjective Complement of a verb :-
1. This was what you said yesterday.
2. This is where I live.
3. My fear is that I may fail.
(b) The Objective Complement of Verb:- We have made him what he is.
(5) (a) Put in Apposition to a Noun: The fact that he is a good boy is well known.
2. Your statement that you met Govind is false.
3. The report that he was killed is untrue.
4. The idea that the sun moves round the earth was shown to be wrong.
5. There is a belief among the Hindus that the appearance of a comet foretells a national calamity.
(b) Put in Apposition to a Pronoun: It is well known that he is a good boy.
2.1 take it that you have finished the work.
3. Depend on it that I shall help you.
4. It is certain that he will be here tomorrow.

N.B. Thus it is seen that Noun clauses are always intro- duced by the Conjunctions: that, if and whether, and by the Interrogative adverbs: when, whence, where, why and how; and by the Interrogative pronouns: who, which and what; and by the Compound relatives: whatever, whichever, whoever, etc.

Adjective Clauses

An Adjective clause does the work of an adjective, so like an Adjective it qualified a noun or a pronoun.

Study the Adjective clauses in the following also:

1. The boy who came here yesterday is gone.
2. This is the book which I lost.
3. Bring me the horse that I bought.
4. Here comes the man whose foot was hurt.
5. This is the girl whom 1 wanted to marry.
6. There was no one present but pitied him.
7. Read such books as are useful.
8. This is the same story as i told you yesterday.
9. You are late again as usual.
10. I collected as many flowers as I could.
11. Do you know the time when he started?
12. Tell me the place where he lives.
13. The reason why he failed is clear.
14. This is the house in which he lived.
15. This is the boy that I spoke of.
16. We follow Mahatma Gandhi than whom India has not produced a nobler son.
17. Those who live in glass houses should not throw stones.
18. People trust those who discharge their debts.
19. He who serves his country serves God.
20. We love them who love us.
21. Whom the gods love die young.
22. Who steals my purse steals trash.
23. This is the way how you should proceed.
24. I will fulfil what I have promised.
25. Give me what you have brought.

N.B. Thus it is seen that Adjective Clauses are always introduced by the relative pronouns: who, which, that, whose, whom, but and as; and by relative adverbs: when, where, why and How.

Note-(a)

1. Do you know the time when he came here?
2. Do you know the place where he lives?
3. Tell me the reason why he was absent.
4. That is not the way how you should treat him.

In the above sentences, when, where, why and how have You are late again as (is)usual (Adj. Clause qualifying the idea contained in the Principal Clause) You are late again as (it is) usual (Adv. Clause of manner modifying are late) Who the gods love (Adj. Clause qualifying those understood).

Those die young (Main Clause). Who steals my purse (Adj. Clause qualifying the understood). He steals trash (Main Clause). time, place, reason and way respectively for their antecedents; so they are relative adverbs and they introduce adjective clauses.

Note-(b)

1. Do you know when he came here?
2. Do you know where he lives?
3. Tell me why he was absent.
4. This is not how you should behave.
In the above sentences, when, where, why and how have no antecedents as before and they introduce noun clauses.

Note-(c) In sentences 24 and 25 above, before the what clauses, the words, “the question” or the words “the answer to the question,”cannot be supplied; so those clauses must be construed as Adjective clauses qualifying the antecedent that understood before them (for purposes of analysis); for the sentence 24 means:-

What I have promised, that I willl fulfil. For purposes or understanding the meaning of the sen- tence, we may replace what by that which, when the sentence reads: I will fulfil that which I have promised.

Ex. 40 D

Pick out the Adjective Clause and give its construction:-
1. This is the boy who takes pains.
2. It is an ill wind that blows nobody good.
3. All that glitters is not gold.
4. This is the place in which Rama lived.
5. What is the cause for which you are come?
6. He would not tell the reason why he refused.
7. He is not a man whom we can trust.
8. This is the boy for whom the police have been searching.
9. Give me as many books as you can spare.
10. The news is not such as I expected.
11. I played with the same bat that he did.
12. There is none but, will agree with me.
13. There is no Hindu but knows the story of Ramayana.
14. Napoleon is a general than whom a better has not been seen.
15. The boy whose pen was lost came weeping to me.
16. This is not the time when you should play.
17. The place where it happened is not known.
18. All is well that ends well.
19. This is a gift from heaven to him who loves best.
20. We will follow Brutus than whom Rome knows no nobler son.

Adverb Clause

An adverb clause does the work of an Adverb; so it adds to the meaning of some Verb, or Adjective or another Adverb i.e. modifies it.
Adverb clauses may be classified as:- Adverb clause of (1) Time, (2) Place, (3) Manner, (4) Extent or Degree (5) Com- parison, (6) Reason or cause, (7) Result or Effect or Conse- quence, (8) Condition or Supposition (9) Purpose, and (10) Concession or Contrast.

(1) Time: When he was six years old his fathr died. It struck me as I was speaking. Wait here until I return. He came here a few minutes after you left. It is long since I heard from you. Make hay while the sun shines. He came here, before I got ready.

As soon as he came here, he heard the news. He entered the room just as the clock struck. The sun will rise so long as the world lasts. You may work as long as there is light. While walking in the dark he sprained his foot (=While he was walking in the dark etc.) Till called for this must be kept (=Till it is called for, etc.) This done, he went home (=When this had been done etc.)

(2) Place: He stood where he was without moving. Where there is a will, there is a way. Let him be arrested wherever he may be found. Go quickly whence you came. Whither thou goest I will go. Fools rush in whereangels fear to tread. Where twain (two) had thought the same good thought, there Allah’s house should be.

(3) Manner: He did as he was told. You reap as you sow.. As is the king, so are the subjects. You may do as you please. He tried to appear as if he liked it. (=He tried to appear as (he would appear) if he liked it). (You) Rewrite as (you are) directed.

Note-In the sentence “The captain set sail with as much indifference as if I had been on board the ship” the clause: as (the captain would set sail) – is an Adv. cl. of degree but not
manner.

(4) Extent or Degree: This is not true so far as I know. He ran as fast as he could. He ran so quickly that I could not overtake him. The more men have, the more they desire. The sooner he comes, the better (it is for him). He is so poor that he cannot pay his school fee.

(5) Comparison:- Rama writes better than Krishna. He is older than he looks. He is as stupid as he is lazy. You are as tall as Gopal. He is not so rich as his brother. No sooner did he see the snake, than he fell senseless.

(6) Reason or Clause: Please grant me leave, as I am not well. He cannot attend school because he is very weak. Since you spoke the truth, I excuse you. Now that you are grown up, you may manage your affairs. Seeing that the medicine did not act, he applied a fresh medicine. He yielded to the enemy, in as much as his army was thoroughly defeated. In that he himself has suffered being tempted, he is able to succour them, that are tempted. I prompted him on the ground that he was efficient.

(7) Result or Effect or Consequence He behaved in such a manner, that he was dismissed from school. Very heavy rain fell so that rivers were soon in floods. So great a fire broke out that London was burnt down.

(8) Condition:- If you work hard, you will succeed. You cannot catch the train unless you walk fast. Had I any money, I would give you some. Were I you, I should not act like that. Should I be appointed in your office, I would try to please you with my work. In case he does not show progress, he will be sent out. But that I saw it with my own eyes, I could not have believed it.

Provided (that) you promise to behave better, I shall excuse you this time. Supposing it were true how would you proceed? But that he is sick he would be here to-day. He sees very well, considering that he is sixty years of age. Whether you call in a doctor or not, he will not recover. Whether good or evil, you will have to put up with it.

(Whether it is good or evil, etc.) If necessary, we must go elsewhere (=If it is necessary etc.) Weather permitting I will come (=If weather permits, etc.) I will forgive you on condition that you do not repeat the mistake.

Note-In each of the following sentences, the main clause is not adversative in meaning; hence the subordinate clauses are to be construed as Adv. Clauses of condition and not concession. Whatever you do, be just (=whether you do this or do that etc.) Whichever way he goes, we are sure to catch him. However he acts, he will not take us by surprise.

Note: A generalizing relative pronoun or relative adjective ro relative adverb without any antecedent expressed or understood, introduces an adverb clause of condition;

(9) Purpose He worked hard that he might pass the examination. He drew his sword in order that he might defend himself. He did not touch me lest he should catch the disease. Men work so that they may earn money.

Note: As an Adverb clause of purpose shows what is wished or desired, the verb in it, is in the Subjunctive mood.

(10) Concession or Contrast:- Though he is poor, he is honest. Though much alarmed at the news, he did not lose hope (=Though he was much alarmed at the news, etc.) He wants to try again, although he has failed a number of times. Even if it rains, Ashall be present there. Weak as I am I can walk a mile without any difficulty. However intelligent you may be, you cannot

1. Generalizing relative pronouns are a special kind of relative pronouns formed by adding ever, or sever to ‘who’ ‘whom’ ‘which’ or ‘what’.
2. Generalizing relative Adjectives which are much commoner are whichever, whichsoever, whatever, whatsoever.
3. Generalizing relative adverb. However. succeed without industry. Notwithstanding that he has already slept for ten hours, he still feels sleepy. For all you say, I still like him. Cost what it might (=whatever it might cost) he would have it. He went out in spite of the fact that he had a bad cold.

However much or often he may try, he will never succeed. However rich he may get, he will not be contented. However well you may work, you cannot demand more than your stipulated pay.

Admitting that he is innocent, he might have avoided bad company. If I am dull (=though I admit that I am dull) I am at least industrious. Whatever amount or trouble he took, he would not make a fortune (=even if he took any amount of trouble etc.)

Note 1. The main clause of a sentence containing a clause of concession is adversative (-opposed) in meaning to the subordinate clause.
Note-2. When the subordinating conjunction however takes some adverb (e.g. much, well or often etc.). or some adjectives (rich, intelligent etc.) it introduces an Adverbial clause of concession.
N.B. Thus it is clearly seen that Adverb clauses are introduced by

(1) the Subordinating Conjunctions as, when, if, because, until, after, since, while, than, unless, before, etc.
(2) the conjunction that when it means so that or in order that, or when it follows so as a correlative and
(3) generalizing relatives without any antecedent expressed or understood.

Now study the following clauses :-

Who – clauses

1. (a) (a) Tell me who beat you. (N.CL.)
(b) Who did you say he was.
Note ‘Who he was’ is a noun clause of ‘did you say’. Who is the subjective complement of Inter, verb was therefore nominative (So whom is wrong).
(b) (a) I know the man who beat you. (Adj. CI.)
(b) He is a man who, I know is trustworthy. (Adj. Cl.) Note-“I know” is an adverbial clause of parenthesis; who is the subject of is trustworthy.
(c) He is a man whom I know to be trustworthy.(Adj. Cl.) Note – Here whom is the object of know.
(c) Rama sent this book to my brother, who sent it to me. (Pr. Cl; who and he).
(d) They should pardon my son, who has never committed such a fault before – (Adv. Cl. of reason who because he). (e) Envoys were sent, who should sue for peace
Envoys were sent, that might sue for peace. (Adv. Cl. of purpose)

Which-clauses

(a) I know which way I should take. (N.CI.)
(b) The book which you gave me is lost. (Adj. CI.)
(c) He hanged all the priisoners, which was a very bar- barous act. (Pr. Cl. which and it).
(d) I cannot solve this sum which is so difficult. (Adv. Cl. of reason; which = because it).

When – clauses

(a) Do you know when he was born? (N.Cl.)
(b) Do you know the time when he was born? (Adj. Col.)
(c) Come to me at 5 p.m. when I shall accompany you to the beach. (Pr. Cl. when = and then).
(d) I was here when he came. (Adv. Cl. of time). Where-clauses
(a) I know where he was born? (N.CL.)
(b) I know the place where he was born? (Adj. Cl.)
(c) On 24th January, we reached Calcutta, where we stayed a fortnight. (Pr. Cl. where = and there).
(d) I live where he lives. (Adc. Cl. of place)

That-clauses

(a) He said that he was going. (N.CI.)
(b) This is the boy that I spoke of. (Adj. Cl.)
(c)(a) He spoke in such a low voice that few could hear him. (Adv. Cl. of result)
(b) He is so poor that he cannot pay his school fees. (Adv. Cl. of extent or degree).
(c) He works hard that he may succeed. (Adv. Cl. of purpose).
(d) He is pround that he is rich (Adv. Cl. of reason). If-clause

6. (a) I doubt if he passed the examination. (N.CL.) (b) (a) If he is in Madras, I shall see him (Adv. Cl. of Condition).
(b) If the English paid ship money (although it is true that they paid ship-money), they did it under protest. (Adv. Cl. of concession)

Why-clause

7. (a) I know why he has come back. (N.CL.)
(b) I know the reason why he has come back. (Adj. Cl.)

But-clauses

8 (a) He is intelligent, but the problem is too hard for him. (Pr. Cl.)
(b) There is no rose but has a thorn. (Adj. Cl.) (but = that not–There is no rose that has not a thorn)
(c-1) (a) It never rains but it pours. (Adv. Cl. of condition; but = unless – It never rains unless it pours) (= it never rains without pouring). There is nothing good or bad but (unless) thinking makes it so
(b) The boy stood on the burning deck whence all but he had fled (even if he did not flee)
(c) I would have gone but that you forbade me (Adj. Cl. of condition; but that if not).
(d) Perdition catch my soul, but I love thee (Adv. Cl. of condition; but if not).
(c-2) (i) He is not such a fool but he can tell that (Adv. Cl. of result; but that not)
(b) Inever go there but I see him.
(Adv. Cl. of result; but when not).
(d) (a) Never fear but I will go. (N. Cl. ; but that- not =Never fear that I will not go)
(b) It cannot be but Nature hath some Director of infinite power. (N. Cl. but that not. It is impossible that Nature has not a Director of Infinite power.

Note 1. In the above sentences it gives emphasis to the noun or pronoun following; and for that purpose, the simple sentence is turned into a complex one; for instance sentence is merely a very emphatic form of saying ‘I want Rama’ — Rama and nobody else.
Note:- 2. In sentence 1 to 6 it =the person(s), while in sentences 7 and 8, it – the thing (s).
Note:-3. The subordinate clauses in the above eight sentences, may be construed as Adjective clauses qualifying the pronoun it.
Note:-4. From the above eight sentences, it is seen that it is used as an antecedent to relatives of either number and any gender and any person.

So the antecedent of the relative pronouns in all the sentences is it, but the verb in the adjective clause agrees (both number and person) with the pronoun before the relative, but not with the antecedent (b) as it generally should; otherwise, ‘I who say’ in sentence (5) and, “They who is’ in sentence (6) sound monstrous.
Note:- 5. In such sentences as:-
(1) Is this a dagger which I see before me?
(2). Is that a knife that he has in his hand?

The adjective clause qualifies this in sentence (1), and that in sentence (2).
B-1. It is rarely that I meet him.
2. It was here that it happened.
3. It was on this condition that I went.
4. It is with this temper that I consider this affair.
N. B.:- At first sight, these sentences appear to be of the form of those sentences containing a formal subject like: ‘It is right that you should come; which is the more usual way of saying “That you should come is right’, but the above sentences in (B) will not bear this inversion; for instance, sentence (1) becomes ‘That I meet him is rarely’, which is nonsense.
In those, four sentences in (B) that is a conjunction so these sentences seem to defy grammatical analysis but the that clauses may be construed as Noun clauses used adverbially to adverb(rarely, here) and adverb equivalents (on this condi- tion, with this temper).
Note:-6. (a) It was twelve O’ clock when I reached this place. (Adv. Cl. of time, modidfying was).
(b) It was yesterday that he repaid the loan, (Noun. Cl. used adverbially to the adverb, yesterday).
(c) I rember the day that he repaid the loan. (Ad. Cl. qualifying the noun, day) Here that (=on which) is an adverbial accusative.

Ex. 40 G.
Analyse into clauses and give their Construction:-
Example: When he reached the cottage door Krishna who had gone out to attend a fair, was grieved to find that his absence had made his mother so ill that she was almost dying.
clause.
Ans: 1. Krishna was grieved to find: — Prinicipal
2. When he reached the cottage door :- Adverb clause of time modifying the verb, was grieved.
3. Who had gone out to attend a fair:– Adjective clause qualifying the noun, Krishna.
4. That his absence had made his mother so ill:-Noun clause, object to the infinitive, to find.
5. That she was almost dying:- Adverb clause of result modifying the adverb, so.
This is a Complex sentence containg four-Subordinate clauses.
(a) – 1. He thinks he is still a young man and will eve to eat the fruit of the tree he is planting.
2. When the pigeons heard this advice, they did as their king told them.
3. When he saw it, he could not make out what it was and why it was put there.
4. A little while after the workmen had left the place, a herd of monkeys, who lived in the trees close by came down to see what was being done.
5. That is the reason, why every bat who has lived since then, is afraid to come out of his den until he knows by the darkness deep that the birds and beasts are all gone to sleep.
6. When he went into the fields next morning, he met the fox, who told him to go straight on till he came to a castle.
7. The prince looked so young, that the King of the country said he would spare his life, if he would bring him the golden horse, which could run quicker than the wind.
8. Next morning the King said that if the price could bring him a lovely princess, who lived in a golden castle, he would spare his life.
9. The moment the prince entered the room in which the King and Queen were sitting, every one in the castle awoke, and the prince was again made prisoner.
10. The bales of cotton which are pressed into small space, are then taken to the factories or mills, where the cotton is spun into yarn or thread.
11. The birds that come to the tree under which I live tell me that you are good and wise, and know everything.

Ans. :-(a)-5-(a) That is the reasnon Pr. Cl. (b) why every bat is afraid… den… Adj. Cl. qualifying reason (c) Who has… then… Adj. Cl. qualifying bat. (d) Until he knows… deep… Adj. Cl. of time modifying is afraid. (e) That the birds… sleep … N. Cl. Object of knows.

(a)-8-(a) Next morning the king said -Pr. Cl. (b) That he would spare his life -N. Cl. object of said. (c) if the prince could-princess-Adv. Cl. of condition, modifying would spare. (d) Who lived… castle — Adj. Cl. qualifying princess.

(b) 1. With the quick insight which every child in Holland has, the boy perceived at once that the water must soon enlarge the hole, through which it was now only dropping and that the whole country would be flooded and ruined.

2. He knew that, if he removed the small slender finger, which he had opposed to the escape of the water, he himself and the whole village, would perish.

3. Certain it is that at day-break he was found in the same painful position by a clergyman; who as he advanced thought he heard groans, and bending over the dyke, discovered that the child was writhing with pain.

4. Uberto was seized as a ‘traitor’, and the nobles thought they used him very gently, when only decreed that he should be banished for ever from Genoa and deprived of all his property.

5. He asked what ransom was expected for the youth, and learned that he was belived to be a person of importance, -not less than two thousand crowns would be taken.

6. The son of a vile mechanic, who told you that one day you might repent the scorn with which you treated him has the satifaction of seeing his prediction accomplished.

7. This Dionysius refused, unless some person could be found who would consent to suffer death in his stead, if he did not perform his promise.

8. If you attain this object, you may serve your friends in Greece so that, when they see you they will look at you as a wonder, as was the case with Themistocles.

9. When the captain saw this, he sent some of the most beautiful things he had, to the king of the country who was so much pleased, that he sent for the captain to come to his palace.

10. When Napoleon Bonaparte invaded Italy the second time, he led his army across the cold stormy Alps, where the snow lies deep all the year round, and the roads are often blocked up by masses of ice.

11. Never was the old saying that a dutiful father had dutiful children better exemplified than in Sir Thomas More’s family.

12. My friends’s talk made so bold an impression on my mind, that soon after I was abed, I fell insensibly into a most unaccountable reverie that had neither moral nor design in it and cannot be so properly called a dream as a delirium.

13. When contrary to the wicked hopes he had formed, his brother proved victorious his envy and malice knew no bounds, and he swore he would burn the chamber where Orlando slept.

14. I once put a wasp into the nest, but when the spider came out in order to seize it as usual, upon perceiving what kind of enemy it had to deal with it instantly broke all the bands that had held it fast and contributed all that lay in its power to disengage so formidable an antagonist.

15. When the ship fell and the mast became nearly horizontal, he crawled out to the mizzen-top, and sat there till the spar gave way and plunged him into the waves, whence he was dragged into one of the boats half-drawned but grasping tight his precious trust.

16. Nor is there in the whole range of nature a grandeur or more magnificent scene than is the ocean in a storm, when deep calls unto deep, and its liquid mountains roll and break against each other, when it dashes to pieces, in the wantonness of its power, the strongest structures which man can rear for the purpose of floating over its billows, than it is that the proudest and bravest tremble and quail at the roaring and thunder of the waves.

17. When such a man perceives that if he fails, every one will be able to understand the risk that has been incurred, but that if he succeeds, no one will estimate the danger that has been silently overcome, he bows nevertheless to the supreme dictates of his judgement, regardless alike of the honours of his own age and the praise of posterity.

Ans–(b) 1-(a) With the quick insight, the boy perceived at once–Pr. Cl. (b) which every child in Holland has — Adj. Cl. qualifying insight. (c) That the water hole… N. Cl. object of of perceived. (d) That the whole country… ruined… (N. Cl. Co. ordinate to ill (e) Through which it droppin Adj. Cl. qualifying hole.

3.(a) Certain it is — Pr. Cl. (b) That at day-break he… clergyman – N. Cl. put in apposition to it. (c) Who thought- -Adj. Cl. qualifying clergyman. (d) As he advanced – Adv. Cl. of time modifying thought. (e) (That) he heard groans. N. Cl. object of thought. (f) (who) bending over the dyke discovered -Ad. Cl. qualifying clergyman. (g) that the child was writhing with pain – N. Cl. object of discovered.

13. (a) His envy and malice knew no bounds — Pr. Cl. (b) When contrary to the wicked hopes his brother proved victorious Adv. Cl. of time, modifying knew. (c) That he had formed — Adj. Cl. qualifying hopes. (d) He swore – Pr. Cl. (e) (That) he would burn the chamber –N. Cl. object of swore. (f) Where Orlando slept -Adj. Cl. qualifying chamber.

14. (a) I once put nest-Pr. CL. (b) But upon perceiving what kind of enemy; it instantly broke all the bands –Pr. Cl. (c) But upon… enemy; it contributed all. –Pr. Cl. (d) When the spider came out seize it– Adv. Cl. of time, modifying broke and contributed. (e) As (it was) usual — Adv. Cl. of manner; modifying came. (f) (That) it had to deal with — Adj. Cl. qualifying enemy. (g) That had held it fast – Adj. Cl. qualifying bands. (h) That lay in its power to disengage so formidable an antagonist – Adj. Cl. qualifying all. (i) As the wasp (formidable) –Adv. Cl. of degree modifying so.

16. (a) Nor is … scene – Pr. Cl. (b) Than is the ocean (grand and magnificient) in a storm)- Adv. Cl. of comparison modifying grandeur and more magnificent. (b) When deep calls unto deep-Adv. Cl. of time modifying is in. (b). (d) (When) its liquid mountains roll — Co. ordinate to c. (e) (When) its liquid mountains break against each other — Co. ordinate to (iii). (f) When it (ocean) dashes to pieces in the wantonness of its power the strongest structures Co-ordinate to c. (g) Which man can… billows – Adj.Cl. qualifying structures. (i) Then it is – Pr. Cl. (j) That the proudest and bravest tremble at the roaring… waves-C. used adverbially to the adverb then (k) (That the proudest and bravest) quail at the roaring… vaves – Coordinate to l.

17. (a) He bows nevertheless… posterity — Pr. Cl. (b) When such a man perceives — ADv. Cl. of time, modifying bows. (c) that every one will be able to understand the risk- -N. Cl. object of perceives. (d) If he fail Adv. Cl. of condition, modifying will be able to understand. (e) That has been incurred — Adj. Cl. qualifying risk. (f) That no one will estimate the danger Co-ordinate to iii. (h) That has been silently over- come– Adj. Cl. qualifying danger. (i) If he succeeds — Adv. Cl. of condition, modifying will estimate